chore(release): v3.0.0-beta.68 [skip ci]

Doesn't look like those hacky esm-cjs imports are needed anymore.

These major pino releases only drop Node.js version support for versions
which payload doesn't support anyways.

.git-blame-ignore-revs

@@ -19,3 +19,6 @@ fb7d1be2f3325d076b7c967b1730afcef37922c2
 
 # 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere
 6789e61488a1d3de56f472ac3214faf344030005
+
+# 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere again
+83fd4c66222d7846eeb5cc332dfa99bf1e830831

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Each test directory is split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when
 
 The following command will start Payload with your config: `pnpm dev my-test-dir`. Example: `pnpm dev fields` for the test/`fields` test suite. This command will start up Payload using your config and refresh a test database on every restart. If you're using VS Code, the most common run configs are automatically added to your editor - you should be able to find them in your VS Code launch tab.
 
-By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/config#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
+By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/overview#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
 
 The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as E-Mail and `test` as password. These are used in the auto-login.
 
@@ -120,5 +120,5 @@ This is how you can preview changes you made locally to the docs:
 2. Run `yarn install`
 3. Duplicate the `.env.example` file and rename it to `.env`
 4. Add a `DOCS_DIR` environment variable to the `.env` file which points to the absolute path of your modified docs folder. For example `DOCS_DIR=/Users/yourname/Documents/GitHub/payload/docs`
-5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: *Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json*. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
+5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: _Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json_. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
 6. You're done! Now you can start the website locally using `yarn run dev` and preview the docs under [http://localhost:3000/docs/](http://localhost:3000/docs/)

docs/access-control/collections.mdx

@@ -6,96 +6,140 @@ desc: With Collection-level Access Control you can define which users can create
 keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Collection-level Access Control within each Collection's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../collections/overview), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
 
-## Available Controls
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Used in the `create` operation               |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` operation               |
-| **[`delete`](#delete)** | Used in the `delete` operation               |
-
-#### Auth-enabled Controls
-
-If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview), the following Access Controls become available:
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`admin`](#admin)**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview)             |
-| **[`unlock`](#unlock)** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation |
-
-**Example Collection config:**
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
 
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: "posts",
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    create: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    delete: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    admin: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    create: () => {...},
+    read: () => {...},
+    update: () => {...},
+    delete: () => {...},
+
+    // Auth-enabled Collections only
+    admin: () => {...},
+    unlock: () => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Collections only
+    readVersions: () => {...},
   },
   // highlight-end
-};
+}
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
+| **`create`** | Used in the `create` operation. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` operation. [More details](#update). |
+| **`delete`** | Used in the `delete` operation. [More details](#delete). |
+
+If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](../authentication/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`admin`**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). [More details](#admin). |
+| **`unlock`** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation. [More details](#unlock). |
+
+If a Collection supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `create` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
-| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
-
-**Example:**
+To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-const PublicUsers = {
-  slug: 'public-users',
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithCreateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   access: {
     // highlight-start
-    // allow guest users to self-registration
-    create: () => true,
+    create: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
     // highlight-end
-    ...
   },
-  fields: [ ... ],
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `create` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
+| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
+
 ### Read
 
-Read access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits the documents that are returned to only those that match the constraint you provide. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to only certain documents however you specify.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `read` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`                           |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithReadAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
-  // allow authenticated users
+export const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
+  // Allow authenticated users
   if (user) {
     return true
   }
-  // using a query constraint, guest users can access when a field named 'isPublic' is set to true
+
+  // By returning a Query, guest users can read public Documents
+  // Note: this assumes you have a `isPublic` checkbox field on your Collection
   return {
-    // assumes we have a checkbox field named 'isPublic'
     isPublic: {
       equals: true,
     },
@@ -103,55 +147,96 @@ const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`.                           |
+
 ### Update
 
-Update access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit the document(s) that can be updated by the currently authenticated user. For example, returning a `query` from the `update` Access Control is helpful in cases where you would like to restrict a user to only being able to update the documents containing a `createdBy` relationship field equal to the user's ID.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `update` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option     | Description                                                                |
-| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update                                       |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with                                |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithUpdateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    update: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
-  // allow users with a role of 'admin'
+export const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
+  // Allow users with a role of 'admin'
   if (user.roles && user.roles.some((role) => role === 'admin')) {
     return true
   }
+
   // allow any other users to update only oneself
   return user.id === id
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                |
+| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update.                                       |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with.                                |
+
 ### Delete
 
 Similarly to the Update function, returns a boolean or a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit which documents can be deleted by which users.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
-| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete                                                                |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithDeleteAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    delete: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
+export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
   if (!id) {
-    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the id
+    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the `id`
     return true
   }
-  // query another collection using the id
+
+  // Query another Collection using the `id`
   const result = await req.payload.find({
     collection: 'contracts',
     limit: 0,
@@ -165,22 +250,90 @@ const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `delete` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.
+
 ### Admin
 
 If the Collection is use to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Admin Access Control to a Collection, use the `admin` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithAdminAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    admin: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `admin` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Unlock
 
-Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/config#options).
+Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/overview#options).
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithUnlockAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    unlock: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `unlock` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Collection has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithVersionsAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/fields.mdx

@@ -1,22 +1,36 @@
 ---
 title: Field-level Access Control
 label: Fields
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Field-level Access Control is specified within a field's config, and allows you to define which users can create, read or update Fields.
 keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field Access Control is specified with functions inside a field's config. All field-level Controls return a boolean value to allow or deny access for the specified operation. No field-level Access Controls support returning query constraints. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
 
-## Available Controls
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
-| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value                             |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value                           |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
 
-**Example Collection config:**
+export const FieldWithAccessControl: Field = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Field Access Controls does not support returning [Query](../queries/overview) constraints like [Collection Access Control](./collections) does.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in the [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
@@ -39,6 +53,14 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 };
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`create`** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. [More details](#read).       |
+| **`update`** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value [More details](#update).    |
+
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. If `false` is returned, any passed values will be discarded.

docs/access-control/globals.mdx

@@ -1,35 +1,44 @@
 ---
 title: Globals Access Control
 label: Globals
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Global-level Access Control is specified within each Global's `access` property and allows you to define which users can read or update Globals.
 keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Global-level Access Control within each Global's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to [Global](../globals/overview) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
 
-## Available Controls
+To add Access Control to a Global, use the `access` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
 
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` Global operation  |
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
 
-**Example Global config:**
+export const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const Header: GlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'header',
+const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Globals only
+    readVersion: () => {...},
   },
   // highlight-end
 }
@@ -37,23 +46,97 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 export default Header
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` Global operation. [More details](#update). |
+
+If a Global supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+
 ### Read
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  read: {
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Update
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    update: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
 
 | Option     | Description                                                                |
 | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 | **`data`** | The data passed to update the global with.                                 |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Global has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const GlobalWithVersionsAccess: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/overview.mdx

@@ -2,84 +2,59 @@
 title: Access Control
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage access control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
+desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage Access Control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
 keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Access control within Payload is extremely powerful while remaining easy and intuitive to manage. Declaring who should have access to what documents is no more complex than writing a simple JavaScript function that either returns a `boolean` or a [`query`](/docs/queries/overview) constraint to restrict which documents users can interact with.
-
 <YouTube id="DoPLyXG26Dg" title="Overview of Payload Access Control" />
 
-**Example use cases:**
+Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By implementing Access Control, you can define granular restrictions based on the user, their roles (RBAC), Document data, or any other criteria your application requires.
 
-- Allowing anyone `read` access to all `Post`s
-- Only allowing public access to `Post`s where a `status` field is equal to `published`
-- Giving only `User`s with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete `Page`(s)
-- Allowing anyone to create `ContactSubmission`s, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
-- Restricting a `User` to only be able to see their own `Order`(s), but no others
-- Allowing `User`s that belong to a certain `Organization` to access only that `Organization`'s `Resource`s
+Access Control functions are scoped to the _operation_, meaning you can have different rules for `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, etc. Access Control functions are executed _before_ any changes are made and _before_ any operations are completed. This allows you to determine if the user has the necessary permissions before fulfilling the request.
 
-## Default Settings
+There are many use cases for Access Control, including:
 
-**By default, all Collections and Globals require that a user is logged in to be able to interact in any way.** The default Access Control function evaluates the `user` from the `req` and returns `true` if a user is logged in, and `false` if not.
+- Allowing anyone `read` access to all posts
+- Only allowing public access to posts where a `status` field is equal to `published`
+- Giving only users with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete posts
+- Allowing anyone to submit contact forms, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
+- Restricting a user to only be able to see their own orders, but noone else's
+- Allowing users that belong to a certain organization to access only that organization's resources
 
-**Default Access function:**
+There are three main types of Access Control in Payload:
+
+- [Collection Access Control](./collections)
+- [Global Access Control](./globals)
+- [Field Access Control](./fields)
+
+## Default Access Control
+
+Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
+
+Here is the default Access Control that Payload provides:
 
 ```ts
 const defaultPayloadAccess = ({ req: { user } }) => {
   // Return `true` if a user is found
   // and `false` if it is undefined or null
-  return Boolean(user)
+  return Boolean(user) // highlight-line
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  In the Local API, all Access Control functions are skipped by default, allowing your server to do
-  whatever it needs. But, you can opt back in by setting the option
-  <strong>
-    overrideAccess
-  </strong>
-  {' '}
-  to <strong>false</strong>.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  In the [Local API](../local-api/overview), all Access Control is _skipped_ by default. This allows your server to have full control over your application. To opt back in, you can set the `overrideAccess` option to `false` in your requests.
 </Banner>
 
-## Access Control Types
+## The Access Operation
 
-You can manage access within Payload on three different levels:
+The Admin Panel responds dynamically to your changes to Access Control. For example, if you restrict editing `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature an "admin" role, Payload will **hide** that Collection from the Admin Panel entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what within your Admin Panel using the same functions that secure your APIs.
 
-- [Collections](/docs/access-control/collections)
-- [Fields](/docs/access-control/fields)
-- [Globals](/docs/access-control/globals)
-
-## When Access Control is Executed
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Access control functions are utilized in two places. It's important to understand how and when
-  your access control is executed.
-</Banner>
-
-### As you execute operations
-
-When you perform Payload operations like `create`, `read`, `update`, and `delete`, your access control functions will be executed before any changes or operations are completed.
-
-### Within the Admin UI
-
-The Payload Admin UI responds dynamically to the access control that you define. For example, if you restrict editing a `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature a `role` of `admin`, the Payload Admin UI will **hide** the `ExampleCollection` from the Admin UI entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what with your Admin UI.
-
-To accomplish this, Payload ships with an `Access` operation, which is executed when a user logs into the Admin UI. Payload will execute each one of your access control functions, across all collections, globals, and fields, at the top level and return a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do with your application.
-
-## Argument Availability
+To accomplish this, Payload exposes the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access). Upon login, Payload executes each Access Control function at the top level, across all Collections, Globals, and Fields, and returns a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do within your application.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  When your access control functions are executed via the <strong>access</strong> operation, the{' '}
-  <strong>id</strong> and <strong>data</strong> arguments will be <strong>undefined</strong>,
-  because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific document.
+  When your access control functions are executed via the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access),  the `id` and `data` arguments will be `undefined`. This is because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific Document.
 </Banner>
 
-If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your access control is being executed via the `access` operation, to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin UI.
+If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your Access Control is being executed via the Access Operation to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin Panel.

docs/admin/collections.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+---
+title: Collection Admin Config
+label: Collections
+order: 20
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Collections](../configuration/collections) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), selecting which fields to display in the List View, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Collections, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
+| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
+| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](../hooks/collections).                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin Panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
+| **`description`**                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
+| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
+| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
+| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
+| **`meta`**                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the Admin Panel. Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
+| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the Admin Panel that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
+| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
+| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](#components).                                                                                       |
+| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
+| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
+
+### Components
+
+Collections can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Collection](../configuration/collections)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Collection Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
+
+export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
+| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
+| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
+| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
+| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table                                                   |
+| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                     |
+| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>
+
+### Pagination
+
+All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis, and uses the same [Pagination](../queries/pagination) API that Payload provides.
+
+To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    pagination: {
+      defaultLimit: 10,
+      limits: [10, 20, 50],
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
+| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
+| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+
+### List Searchable Fields
+
+In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
+
+To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/components.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Swap in your own React components
 label: Custom Components
-order: 20
+order: 40
 desc: Fully customize your Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Add fields, remove views, update routes and change functions to sculpt your perfect Dashboard.
 keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev
 There are four main types of Custom Components in Payload:
 
 - [Root Components](#root-components)
-- [Collection Components](#collection-components)
-- [Global Components](#global-components)
+- [Collection Components](./collections#components)
+- [Global Components](./globals#components)
 - [Field Components](./fields)
 
 To swap in your own Custom Component, consult the list of available components. Determine the scope that corresponds to what you are trying to accomplish, then [author your React component(s)](#building-custom-components) accordingly.
@@ -38,11 +38,11 @@ import { MyCustomLogo } from './MyCustomLogo'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   admin: {
+    // highlight-start
     components: {
-      graphics: {
-        Logo: MyCustomLogo, // highlight-line
-      },
+      // ...
     },
+    // highlight-end
   },
 })
 ```
@@ -63,17 +63,18 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`logout.Button`**   | The button displayed in the sidebar that logs the user out.                                                                                                                                                         |
 | **`graphics.Icon`**   | The simplified logo used in contexts like the the `Nav` component.                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`graphics.Logo`**   | The full logo used in contexts like the `Login` view.                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`providers`**       | Custom [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context) providers that will wrap the entire [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](#custom-providers).                                       |
-| **`actions`**         | An array of Custom Components to be rendered in the header of the [Admin Panel](./overview), providing additional interactivity and functionality.                                                                  |
-| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`providers`**       | Custom [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context) providers that will wrap the entire Admin Panel. [More details](#custom-providers).                                       |
+| **`actions`**         | An array of Custom Components to be rendered in the header of the Admin Panel, providing additional interactivity and functionality.                                                                  |
+| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                                                                                                                 |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> You can also use the `admin.components` property in your _[Collection](#collection-components) or [Global](#global-components)_.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  You can also use set [Collection Components](./collections#components) and [Global Components](./globals#components) in their respective configs.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Custom Providers
 
-As you add more and more Custom Components to your [Admin Panel](./overview), you may find it helpful to add additional [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context)(s). Payload allows you to inject your own context providers in your app where you can export your own custom hooks, etc.
+As you add more and more Custom Components to your [Admin Panel](./overview), you may find it helpful to add additional [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context)(s). Payload allows you to inject your own context providers in your app so you can export your own custom hooks, etc.
 
 To add a Custom Provider, use the `admin.components.providers` property in your [Payload Config](../getting-started/overview):
 
@@ -115,80 +116,6 @@ export const useMyCustomContext = () => useContext(MyCustomContext)
   <strong>Reminder:</strong> Custom Providers are by definition Client Components. This means they must include the `use client` directive at the top of their files and cannot use server-only code.
 </Banner>
 
-## Collection Components
-
-Collection Components are those that effect [Collection](../configuration/collections)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the save button or the List View.
-
-To override Collection Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
-
-export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-collection',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      edit: {
-        SaveButton: CustomSaveButton, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-  // ...
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](#building-custom-components)._
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
-| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
-| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
-| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
-| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table                                                   |
-| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be disabled                                     |
-| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
-| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a Custom Component.                                                          |
-| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                     |
-
-## Global Components
-
-Global Components are those that effect [Global](../configuration/globals)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the save button or the Edit View.
-
-To override Global Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
-
-export const MyGlobal: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-global',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      elements: {
-        SaveButton: CustomSaveButton, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-  // ...
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](#building-custom-components)._
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be disabled.                                    |
-| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
-| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a Custom Component.                                                          |
-| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                     |
-
 ## Building Custom Components
 
 All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default, with the exception of [Custom Providers](#custom-providers). This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api) directly on the front-end, among other things.

docs/admin/customizing-css.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing CSS & SCSS
 label: Customizing CSS
-order: 60
+order: 80
 desc: Customize the Payload Admin Panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
 keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---

docs/admin/fields.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing Fields
 label: Customizing Fields
-order: 40
+order: 60
 desc:
 keywords:
 ---
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ For example, your app might need to render a specific interface that Payload doe
 
 ## Admin Options
 
-You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overvieW) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overview) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'

docs/admin/globals.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+---
+title: Global Admin Config
+label: Globals
+order: 30
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Globals](../configuration/globals) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), setting page metadata, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Globals, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
+| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
+| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
+| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](#components).                           |
+| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin Panel for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
+| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
+| **`meta`**        | Metadata overrides to apply to the Admin Panel. Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
+
+### Components
+
+Globals can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Global](../configuration/globals)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Global Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
+
+export const MyGlobal: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                    |
+| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: React Hooks
 label: React Hooks
-order: 50
+order: 70
 desc: Make use of all of the powerful React hooks that Payload provides.
 keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---

docs/admin/overview.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Manage your data and customize the Payload Admin Panel by swapping in your
 keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) admin panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) Admin Panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
 
 The Admin Panel is designed to [white-label your brand](https://payloadcms.com/blog/white-label-admin-ui). You can endlessly customize and extend the Admin UI by swapping in your own [Custom Components](./components)—everything from simple field labels to entire views can be modified or replaced to perfectly tailor the interface for your editors.
 
@@ -55,6 +55,11 @@ As shown above, all Payload routes are nested within the `(payload)` route group
 
 The `admin` directory contains all the _pages_ related to the interface itself, whereas the `api` and `graphql` directories contains all the _routes_ related to the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). All admin routes are [easily configurable](#customizing-routes) to meet your application's exact requirements.
 
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you don't use the [REST API](../rest/overview) or [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can delete the [Next.js files corresponding to those routes](../admin/overview#project-structure), however, the overhead of this API is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down or affect Payload outside of the endpoints.
+</Banner>
+
 Finally, the `custom.scss` file is where you can add or override globally-oriented styles in the Admin Panel, such as modify the color palette. Customizing the look and feel through CSS alone is a powerful feature of the Admin Panel, [more on that here](./customizing-css).
 
 All auto-generated files will contain the following comments at the top of each file:
@@ -81,23 +86,23 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `user`            | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                                                                                                                                        |
-| `buildPath`       | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                                                                                                                                  |
-| `meta`            | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per Collection or per Global basis.                                                                                                       |
-| `disable`         | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| `dateFormat`      | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                                                                                                                             |
-| `avatar`          | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| `autoLogin`       | Used to automate admin log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/config).                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `livePreview`     | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                                                                                                       |
-| `components`      | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `routes`          | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| `custom`          | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                                                           |
+|---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `avatar`      | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                              |
+| `autoLogin`   | Used to automate log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                            |
+| `buildPath`   | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                            |
+| `components`  | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                        |
+| `custom`      | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                            |
+| `dateFormat`  | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                       |
+| `disable`     | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                            |
+| `livePreview` | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                         |
+| `meta`        | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per Collection or per Global basis. |
+| `routes`      | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                 |
+| `user`        | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                          |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize the admin options for _Collections and Globals_ through their respective `admin` keys.
+  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Admin Options](./collections) and [Global Admin Options](./globals) through their respective `admin` keys.
 </Banner>
 
 ### The Admin User Collection
@@ -132,7 +137,7 @@ To do this, specify `admin: { user: 'admins' }` in your config. This will provid
 
 ### Role-based Access Control
 
-It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions. For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
+It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions, known as role-based access control (RBAC). For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
 
 - `super-admin` - full access to the Admin Panel to perform any action
 - `editor` - limited access to the Admin Panel to only manage content

docs/admin/preferences.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Managing User Preferences
 label: Preferences
-order: 50
+order: 70
 desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin Panel.
 keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a
   that is reading or setting a preference via all provided authentication methods.
 </Banner>
 
-## Use cases
+## Use Cases
 
 This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin Panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin Panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
 

docs/admin/views.mdx

@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing Views
 label: Customizing Views
-order: 30
+order: 50
 desc:
 keywords:
 ---
 
 Views are the individual pages that make up the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the Dashboard, List, and Edit views. One of the most powerful ways to customize the Admin Panel is to create Custom Views. These are [Custom Components](./components) that can either replace built-in views or can be entirely new.
 
-Within the Admin Panel, there are four types of views:
+There are four types of views within the Admin Panel:
 
 - [Root Views](#root-views)
 - [Collection Views](#collection-views)
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 Your Custom Views will be provided with the following props:
 
 | Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`user`**                    | The currently logged in user.                                                                                                          |
 | **`locale`**                  | The current [Locale](../configuration/localization) of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                                  |
 | **`navGroups`**               | The grouped navigation items according to `admin.group` in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview). |

docs/authentication/api-keys.mdx

@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ your API keys will not be.
 
 ### HTTP Authentication
 
-To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper access control. By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
+To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper [Access Control](../access-control/overview). By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
 
 **For example, using Fetch:**
 
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
 })
 ```
 
-Payload ensures that the same, uniform access control is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing access control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
+Payload ensures that the same, uniform [Access Control](../access-control/overview) is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing Access Control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
 
 ### API Key Only Auth
 

docs/authentication/config.mdx

@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Authentication Config
-label: Config
-order: 20
-desc: Enable and customize options in the Authentication config for features including Forgot Password, Login Attempts, API key usage and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-Payload's Authentication is extremely powerful and gives you everything you need when you go to build a new app or site in a secure and responsible manner.
-
-To enable Authentication on a collection, define an `auth` property and set it to either `true` or to an object containing the options below.
-
-## Options
-
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More](/docs/authentication/config#api-keys)                                                                       |
-| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
-| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
-| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
-| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password)                                                                                                                |
-| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More](/docs/authentication/config#email-verification)                                  |
-| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
-| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies)                                                                         |
-
-### Forgot Password
-
-You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
-  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
-  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
-  free to choose your own.
-</Banner>
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
-        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
-
-        return `
-          <!doctype html>
-          <html>
-            <body>
-              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
-              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
-              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
-              <p>
-                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
-              </p>
-            </body>
-          </html>
-        `
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
-  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
-  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
-  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Email Verification
-
-If you'd like to require email verification before a user can successfully log in, you can enable it by passing `true` or an `options` object to `auth.verify`. The following options are available:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    verify: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
-        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
-
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
-  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
-  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
-  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Admin autologin
-
-For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the admin user to login in order to access the panel.
-The `admin.autologin` property is used to configure the how visitors are handled when accessing the admin panel.
-The default is that all users will have to login and this should not be enabled for environments where data needs to protected.
-
-#### autoLogin Options
-
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
-| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as                                                                            |
-| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
-
-The recommended way to use this feature is behind an environment variable to ensure it is disabled when in production.
-
-**Example:**
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    user: 'users',
-    // highlight-start
-    autoLogin:
-      process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
-        ? {
-            email: 'test@example.com',
-            password: 'test',
-            prefillOnly: true,
-          }
-        : false,
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-  collections: [
-    /** */
-  ],
-})
-```

docs/authentication/cookies.mdx

@@ -1,19 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Cookie Strategy
 label: Cookie Strategy
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Enable HTTP Cookie based authentication to interface with Payload.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload `login`, `logout`, and `refresh` operations make use of HTTP-only cookies for authentication purposes.
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via HTTP-only cookies. These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
 ### Automatic browser inclusion
@@ -38,7 +35,6 @@ For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API,
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
   To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
   the browsers Developer Tools > Application > Cookies > [your-domain-here]. The Developer tools
   will still show HTTP-only cookies.
@@ -65,7 +61,7 @@ In this scenario, if your cookie was still valid, malicious-intent.com would be
 
 ### CSRF Prevention
 
-Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload config to do this:
+Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload Config to do this:
 
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts

docs/authentication/custom-strategies.mdx

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
 
 ### Creating a strategy
 
-At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from passportJS in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
+At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from [Passport](https://www.passportjs.org) in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
 
 A strategy is made up of the following:
 

docs/authentication/email.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+---
+title: Authentication Emails
+label: Email Verification
+order: 30
+desc: Email Verification allows users to verify their email address before they're account is fully activated. Email Verification ties directly into the Email functionality that Payload provides.
+keywords: authentication, email, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+[Authentication](./overview) ties directly into the [Email](../email) functionality that Payload provides. This allows you to send emails to users for verification, password resets, and more. While Payload provides default email templates for these actions, you can customize them to fit your brand.
+
+## Email Verification
+
+Email Verification forces users to prove they have access to the email address they can authenticate. This will help to reduce spam accounts and ensure that users are who they say they are.
+
+To enable Email Verification, use the `auth.verify` property on your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: true // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Verification emails are fully customizable. [More details](#generateEmailHTML).
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
+        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
+
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
+  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
+  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
+  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+## Forgot Password
+
+You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+This function allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
+        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
+
+        return `
+          <!doctype html>
+          <html>
+            <body>
+              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
+              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
+              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
+              <p>
+                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
+              </p>
+            </body>
+          </html>
+        `
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
+  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
+  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
+  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
+  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
+  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
+  free to choose your own.
+</Banner>
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailHTML` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `token`  | The token that is generated for the user to reset their password.                             |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailSubject` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |

docs/authentication/jwt.mdx

@@ -6,14 +6,11 @@ desc: Enable JSON Web Token based authentication to interface with Payload.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload offers the ability to authenticate via `JWT` (JSON web token). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via JSON Web Tokens (JWT). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
 ### Identifying Users Via The Authorization Header

docs/authentication/operations.mdx

@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Authentication Operations
 label: Operations
-order: 80
+order: 20
 desc: Enabling Authentication automatically makes key operations available such as Login, Logout, Verify, Unlock, Reset Password and more.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Enabling Authentication on a Collection automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the Local, REST, and GraphQL APIs.
+Enabling [Authentication](./overview) on a [Collection](../configuration/collections) automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
 
 ## Access
 
-The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on access control, as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
+The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on [Access Control](../access-control/overview), just as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
 
 **REST API endpoint**:
 
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Payload comes with built-in forgot password functionality. Submitting an email a
 
 The link to reset the user's password contains a token which is what allows the user to securely reset their password.
 
-By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password).
+By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/overview#forgot-password).
 
 **Example REST API Forgot Password**:
 

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -11,38 +11,47 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
   title="Simplified Authentication for Headless CMS: Unlocking Reusability in One Line"
 />
 
-<Banner>
-  Payload provides for highly secure and customizable user Authentication out of the box, which
-  allows for users to identify themselves to Payload.
-</Banner>
+Authentication is a critical part of any application. Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), all well as your own external applications, completely eliminating the need for paid, third-party platforms and services.
 
-Authentication is used within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) itself as well as throughout your app(s) themselves however you determine necessary.
+Here are some common use cases of Authentication in your own applications:
 
-![Authentication admin panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
-_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+- Customer accounts for an e-commerce app
+- User accounts for a SaaS product
+- P2P apps or social sites where users need to log in and manage their profiles
+- Online games where players need to track their progress over time
 
-**Here are some common use cases of Authentication outside of Payload's dashboard itself:**
+When Authentication is enabled on a [Collection](../configuration/collections), Payload injects all necessary functionality to support the entire user flow. This includes all [auth-related operations](./operations) like account creation, logging in and out, and resetting passwords, all [auth-related emails](./email) like email verification and password reset, as well as any necessary UI to manage users from the Admin Panel.
 
-- Customer accounts for an ecommerce app
-- Customer accounts for a SaaS product
-- P2P app or social site where users need to log in and manage their profiles
-- Online game where players need to track their progress over time
-
-By default, Payload provides you with a `User` collection that supports Authentication, which is used to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). But, you can add support to one or many Collections of your own. For more information on how to customize, override, or remove the default `User` collection, [click here](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
-
-## Enabling Auth on a collection
-
-Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Authentication by specifying the `auth` property on the Collection's config to either `true` or to an object containing `auth` options.
-
-**For a full list of all `auth` options, [click here](/docs/authentication/config).**
-
-Simple example collection:
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collection#auth):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: true, // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+![Authentication Admin Panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
+_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+
+## Config Options
+
+Any [Collection](../configuration/collections) can opt-in to supporting Authentication. Once enabled, each Document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a "user". This enables a complete authentication workflow on your Collection, such as logging in and out, resetting their password, and more.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  By default, Payload provides an auth-enabled `User` Collection which is used to access the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
+</Banner>
+
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'admins',
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   auth: {
     tokenExpiration: 7200, // How many seconds to keep the user logged in
@@ -52,53 +61,136 @@ export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
     // More options are available
   },
   // highlight-end
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'role',
-      type: 'select',
-      required: true,
-      options: ['user', 'admin', 'editor', 'developer'],
-    },
-  ],
 }
 ```
 
-**By enabling Authentication on a config, the following modifications will automatically be made to your Collection:**
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  For default auth behavior, set `auth: true`. This is a good starting point for most applications.
+</Banner>
 
-1. `email` as well as password `salt` & `hash` fields will be added to your Collection's schema
-1. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) will feature a new set of corresponding UI to allow for changing password and editing email
-1. [A new set of `operations`](/docs/authentication/operations) will be exposed via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Auth-enabled Collections with be automatically injected with the `hash`, `salt`, and `email` fields. [More details](../fields/overview#field-names).
+</Banner>
 
-Once enabled, each document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a `user` - who can make use of commonly required authentication functions such as logging in / out, resetting their password, and more.
+The following options are available:
 
-## Authentication Strategies
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
+| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
+| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More details](./email#forgot-password).                                                                                                             |
+| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
+| **`loginWithUsername`**    | Ability to allow users to login with username/password. [More](/docs/authentication/overview#login-with-username)                                                                                                                     |
+| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
+| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More details](./custom-strategies).                                                                         |
+| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More details](./api-keys).                                                                       |
+| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More details](./email#email-verification).                                  |
 
-Out of the box Payload ships with a few powerful authentication strategies. HTTP-Only Cookies, JWT's and API-Keys, they can work together or individually. You can also have multiple collections that have auth enabled, but only 1 of them can be used to log into the admin panel.
+### Login With Username
+
+You can allow users to login with their username instead of their email address by setting the `loginWithUsername` property to `true`.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: true,
+  },
+}
+```
+
+Or, you can pass an object with additional options:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: {
+      allowEmailLogin: true, // default: false
+      requireEmail: false, // default: false
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+**`allowEmailLogin`**
+
+If set to `true`, users can log in with either their username or email address. If set to `false`, users can only log in with their username.
+
+**`requireEmail`**
+
+If set to `true`, an email address is required when creating a new user. If set to `false`, email is not required upon creation.
+
+## Auto-Login
+
+For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the user to login in order to access your application. Typically, all users should be required to login, however, you can speed up local development time by enabling auto-login.
+
+To enable auto-login, set the `autoLogin` property in the [Admin Config](../configuration/admin):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  autoLogin:
+    process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
+      ? {
+          email: 'test@example.com',
+          password: 'test',
+          prefillOnly: true,
+        }
+      : false,
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  The recommended way to use this feature is behind an [Environment Variable](../configuration/environment-vars). This will ensure it is _disabled_ in production.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
+|-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`username`**    | The username of the user to login as                                                                            |
+| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
+| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as. This is only needed if `prefillOnly` is set to true                       |
+| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
+
+## Operations
+
+All auth-related operations are available via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs. These operations are automatically added to your Collection when you enable Authentication. [More details](./operations).
+
+## Strategies
+
+Out of the box Payload ships with a three powerful Authentication strategies:
+
+- [HTTP-Only Cookies](./cookies)
+- [JSON Web Tokens (JWT)](./jwt)
+- [API-Keys](./api-keys)
+
+Each of these strategies can work together or independently. You can also create your own custom strategies to fit your specific needs. [More details](./custom-strategies).
 
 ### HTTP-Only Cookies
 
-HTTP-only cookies are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [HTTP-Only Cookies](/docs/authentication/http-only-cookies) docs.
+[HTTP-only cookies](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies) are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's. [More details](./cookies).
 
 ### JSON Web Tokens
 
-JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [JWT](/docs/authentication/jwt) docs.
+JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users. [More details](./jwt).
 
 ### API Keys
 
-API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [API Keys](/docs/authentication/api-keys) docs.
+API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service. [More details](./api-keys).
 
 ### Custom Strategies
 
-There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to.
-
-You can learn more about custom strategies from the [Custom Strategies](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies) docs.
-
-## Logging in / out, resetting password, etc.
-
-[Click here](/docs/authentication/operations) for a list of all automatically-enabled Auth operations, including `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and others.
+There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to. [More details](./custom-strategies).

docs/authentication/token-data.mdx

@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ### Using Token Data
 
-This is especially helful when writing hooks and access control that depend on user defined fields.
+This is especially helpful when writing [Hooks](../hooks/overview) and [Access Control](../access-control/overview) that depend on user defined fields.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -59,9 +59,7 @@ You can update settings from your Project’s Settings tab. Changes to your buil
 From the Environment Variables page of the Settings tab, you can add, update and delete variables for use in your project. Like build settings, these changes will trigger a redeployment of your project.
 
 <Banner>
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed
-  with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](../configuration/environment-vars).
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`. [More details](../configuration/environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
 ## Custom Domains
@@ -98,13 +96,13 @@ From there, you are ready to make updates to your project. When you are ready to
 
 ## Cloud Plugin
 
-Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload config:
+Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload Config:
 
 `yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-cloud`
 
 ```js
 import { payloadCloud } from '@payloadcms/plugin-cloud'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   plugins: [payloadCloud()],
@@ -113,7 +111,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** If your Payload config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
+  **Note:** If your Payload Config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
   over Payload Cloud's email service.
 </Banner>
 

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,13 @@ desc: Structure your Collections for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Collections are defined through configs of their own. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Collection will automatically scaffold a new collection / table in your database of choice, based on fields that you define.
+A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Document in a Collection is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-## Config Options
+Collections are also used to achieve [Authentication](../authentication/overview) in Payload. By defining a Collection with `auth` options, that Collection receives additional operations to support user authentication.
 
-To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview).
+Collections are the primary way to structure recurring data in your application, such as users, products, pages, posts, and other types of content that you might want to manage. Each Collection can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
+
+To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -18,12 +20,19 @@ import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   collections: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Collection Configs go here
+    // Your Collections go here
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main Payload Config.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If your Collection is only ever meant to contain a single Document, consider using a [Global](./globals) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](../overview).
 
 Here is what a simple Collection Config might look like:
 
@@ -43,24 +52,24 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
 |------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`access`**           | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/overview/#collections).                                                   |
-| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. For more, consult the [Authentication](../authentication/config) documentation.                                                          |
+| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/collections).                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/collections).                                                   |
+| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                          |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                          |
 | **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this Collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
 | **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
-| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or Collection name depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
+| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or Collection name depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
 | **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                    |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [More details](../fields/overview). |
 | **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
-| **`hooks`**            | Entry points to "tie in" to Collection actions at specific points. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                         |
+| **`hooks`**            | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                         |
 | **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
 | **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
@@ -70,157 +79,28 @@ The following options are available:
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Options
+### Fields
 
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis.
-
-To configure Collection Admin Options, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
-| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
-| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](#admin-hooks).                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
-| **`description`**                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
-| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
-| **`meta`**                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
-| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
-| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
-| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](../admin/components#collections).                                                                                       |
-| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
-| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
-
-#### Preview
-
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
-
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The preview function receives two arguments:
-
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
-
-### Pagination
-
-All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis.
-
-To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    pagination: {
-      defaultLimit: 10,
-      limits: [10, 20, 50],
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
-| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
-| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+Fields define the schema of the Documents within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Access Control
 
-You can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with documents in a Collection) on a Collection by
-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) docs.
+[Collection Access Control](../access-control/overview) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Hooks are a powerful way to extend Collection functionality and execute your own logic, and can be defined on a
-Collection by Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Collection Hooks](../hooks/collections) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
-### List Searchable Fields
+### Admin Options
 
-In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
-
-To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
-</Banner>
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Collection Admin Options](../admin/collections) documentation.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Collection types as follows:
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Collection configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Collection Config, `CollectionConfig` and `SanitizeCollectionConfig`.
+
+The `CollectionConfig` type represents a raw Collection Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedCollectionConfig` type represents a Collection Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming Collection configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Collection config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import { CollectionConfig, SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -7,9 +7,11 @@ desc: Learn how to use Environment Variables in your Payload project
 
 Environment Variables are a way to store sensitive information that your application needs to function. This could be anything from API keys to [Database](../database/overview) credentials. Payload allows you to easily use Environment Variables within your config and throughout your application.
 
-If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file. Otherwise, you can use the `dotenv` package to load your Environment Variables into `process.env`. [More details](#outside-of-nextjs).
+## Next.js Applications
 
-Environment Variables are typically stored in an `.env` file at the root of your project:
+If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file.
+
+To use Environment Variables, add a `.env` file to the root of your project:
 
 ```plaintext
 project-name/
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@ SERVER_URL=localhost:3000
 DATABASE_URI=mongodb://localhost:27017/my-database
 ```
 
-To use Environment Variables in your Payload config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
+To use Environment Variables in your Payload Config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -6,9 +6,9 @@ desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections). The big difference is that Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app might rely on.
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global Document is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-## Config Options
+Globals are the primary way to structure singletons in Payload, such as a header navigation, site-wide banner alerts, or app-wide localized strings. Each Global can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
 
 To define a Global Config, use the `globals` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
@@ -18,12 +18,19 @@ import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   globals: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Global Configs go here
+    // Your Globals go here
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main Payload Config.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you have more than one Global that share the same structure, consider using a [Collection](../configuration/collections) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](./overview).
 
 Here is what a simple Global Config might look like:
 
@@ -53,22 +60,22 @@ export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`access`**       | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/overview/#globals).                                                                    |
-| **`admin`**        | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                           |
+| **`access`**       | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/globals).                                                                    |
+| **`admin`**        | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/globals).                                                                           |
 | **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
 | **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
 | **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
+| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [More details](../fields/overview). |
 | **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                          |
-| **`hooks`**        | Entry points to "tie in" to collection actions at specific points. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).  |
+| **`hooks`**        | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).  |
 | **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.    |
@@ -76,95 +83,28 @@ The following options are available:
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
+### Fields
+
+Fields define the schema of the Global. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Access Control
 
-As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) docs.
+[Global Access Control](../access-control/globals) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Global Document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Global Hooks](../hooks/globals) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Admin Options
 
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis.
-
-To configure Collection Admin Options, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
-| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
-| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
-| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](../admin/components#globals).                           |
-| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
-| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
-| **`meta`**        | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
-
-#### Preview
-
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
-
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The preview function receives two arguments:
-
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis. To learn more, go to the [Global Admin Options](../admin/globals) documentation.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Global types as follows:
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Global configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Global Config, `GlobalConfig` and `SanitizeGlobalConfig`.
+
+The `GlobalConfig` type represents a raw Global Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedGlobalConfig` type represents a Global Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming Global configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Global config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import { GlobalConfig, SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/i18n.mdx

@@ -6,9 +6,22 @@ desc: Manage and customize internationalization support in your CMS editor exper
 keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With i18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. Users can easily select a language from the Account View and have their preference saved for future visits.
+The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
 
-By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+
+To configure I18n, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  i18n: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+})
+```
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -19,19 +32,44 @@ By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily loa
 
 You can easily customize and override any of the i18n settings that Payload provides by default. Payload will use your custom options and merge them in with its own.
 
-To add a new language, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
-
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { en } from 'payload/i18n/en'
-import { de } from 'payload/i18n/de'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   // highlight-start
   i18n: {
-    // Payload will support either English or German,
-    // able to be specified in preferences on a user-by-user basis
+    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
+    debug: false, // default
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
+| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
+| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
+| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
+
+## Adding Languages
+
+You can easily add new languages to your Payload app by providing the translations for the new language. Payload maintains a number of built-in translations that can be imported from `@payloadcms/translations`, but you can also provide your own [Custom Translations](#custom-translations) to support any language.
+
+To add a new language, use the `i18n.supportedLanguages` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { en } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/en'
+import { de } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/de'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  i18n: {
     supportedLanguages: { en, de },
   },
   // highlight-end
@@ -43,27 +81,18 @@ export default buildConfig({
  It's best to only support the languages that you need so that the bundled JavaScript is kept to a minimum for your project.
 </Banner>
 
-The following options are available:
+### Custom Translations
 
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
-| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
-| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
-| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
+You can customize Payload's built-in translations either by extending existing languages or by adding new languages entirely. This can be done by injecting new translation strings into existing languages, or by providing an entirely new language keys altogether.
 
-## Custom Translations
-
-Here is an example of how you can add custom translations to your project:
+To add Custom Translations, use the `i18n.translations` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   //...
   i18n: {
-    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
-    debug: false, // default
     // highlight-start
     translations: {
       en: {
@@ -83,9 +112,11 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-While Payload's built-in features come translated, you may want to also translate parts of your project's configuration too. This is possible in places like Collections and Globals labels and groups, field labels, descriptions and input placeholder text. The admin UI will display all the correct translations you provide based on the user's language.
+### Project Translations
 
-Here is an example of a simple collection supporting both English and Spanish editors:
+While Payload's built-in features come fully translated, you may also want to translate parts of your own project. This is possible in places like [Collections](./collections) and [Globals](./globals), such as on their labels and groups, field labels, descriptions or input placeholder text.
+
+To do this, provide the translations wherever applicable, keyed to the language code:
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -94,39 +125,45 @@ export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'articles',
   labels: {
     singular: {
+      // highlight-start
       en: 'Article',
       es: 'Artículo',
+      // highlight-end
     },
     plural: {
+      // highlight-start
       en: 'Articles',
       es: 'Artículos',
+      // highlight-end
     },
   },
   admin: {
-    group: { en: 'Content', es: 'Contenido' },
+    group: {
+      // highlight-start
+      en: 'Content',
+      es: 'Contenido',
+      // highlight-end
+    },
   },
   fields: [
     {
       name: 'title',
       type: 'text',
       label: {
+        // highlight-start
         en: 'Title',
         es: 'Título',
+        // highlight-end
       },
       admin: {
-        placeholder: { en: 'Enter title', es: 'Introduce el título' },
+        placeholder: {
+          // highlight-start
+          en: 'Enter title',
+          es: 'Introduce el título'
+          // highlight-end
+        },
       },
     },
-    {
-      name: 'type',
-      type: 'radio',
-      options: [
-        {
-          value: 'news',
-          label: { en: 'News', es: 'Noticias' },
-        }, // etc...
-      ],
-    },
   ],
 }
 ```
@@ -135,7 +172,7 @@ export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
 
 Payload's backend sets the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
 
-Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
+Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access Payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
@@ -169,7 +206,7 @@ export const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 
 ```
 
-Additionally, payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
+Additionally, Payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
 
 ```ts
 import type {
@@ -177,7 +214,7 @@ import type {
   NestedKeysStripped,
   TFunction,
 } from '@payloadcms/translations'
-import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const customTranslations = {
   en: {

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -2,36 +2,45 @@
 title: Localization
 label: Localization
 order: 50
-desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
+desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload Config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
 keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All
-localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
+Localization is one of the most important features of a modern CMS. It allows you to manage content in multiple languages, then serve it to your users based on their requested language. This is similar to [I18n](./i18n), but instead of managing translations for your application's interface, you are managing translations for the data itself.
 
-## Enabling in the Payload config
+With Localization, you can begin to serve personalized content to your users based on their specific language preferences, such as a multilingual website or multi-site application. There are no limits to the number of locales you can add to your Payload project.
 
-Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a
-list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
-
-**Example Payload config set up for localization:**
+To configure Localization, use the `localization` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
+  // ...
+  localization: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
   },
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects:**
+## Config Options
+
+Add the `localization` property to your Payload Config to enable Localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
+
+To configure locales, use the `localization.locales` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  localization: {
+    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'] // highlight-line
+  },
+})
+```
+
+You can also define locales using [full configuration objects](#locale-object):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -60,50 +69,26 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects (
-including [internationalization](/docs/configuration/i18n) support):**
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Localization works very well alongside [I18n](/docs/configuration/i18n).
+</Banner>
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+The following options are available:
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: [
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'English', // English label
-          nb: 'Engelsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'en',
-      },
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'Norwegian', // English label
-          nb: 'Norsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'nb',
-      },
-    ],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
-  },
-})
-```
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                                    |
+| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| **`locales`**  | Array of all the languages that you would like to support. [More details](#locales)                                            |
+| **`defaultLocale`** | Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified, documents will be returned in this locale. |
+| **`fallback`** | Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated. |
 
-**Here is a brief explanation of each of the options available within the `localization` property:**
+### Locales
 
-**`locales`**
+The locales array is a list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be strings for each language code, or [full configuration objects](#locale-object) for more advanced options.
 
-Array-based list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be an array containing strings for each
-language code you want your project to store and serve or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, `rtl` (
-right-to-left), and `fallbackLocale` property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you
-to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter
-language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
 
-## Locale Object Properties
+#### Locale Object
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
 | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
@@ -114,23 +99,11 @@ language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-**`defaultLocale`**
+## Field Localization
 
-Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified,
-documents will be returned in this locale.
+Payload Localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload Config to support Localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
 
-**`fallback`**
-
-Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a
-localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically
-fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
-
-## Field by field localization
-
-Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config
-to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
-
-**Here is an example of how to enable localization for a field:**
+**Here is an example of how to enable Localization for a field:**
 
 ```js
 {
@@ -142,31 +115,27 @@ to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to l
 }
 ```
 
-With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of
-a single string.
+With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of a single string.
 
-All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s
-and `block`s.
+All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
 
-<Banner>
+<Banner type="info">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Enabling localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
+  Enabling Localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
   localized "sets" of all fields contained within the field. For example, if you have a page layout
   using a blocks field type, you have the choice of either localizing the full layout, by enabling
-  localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
+  Localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
   When converting an existing field to or from `localized: true` the data structure in the document
   will change for this field and so existing data for this field will be lost. Before changing the
-  localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
+  Localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
   strategy.
 </Banner>
 
-## Retrieving localized docs
+## Retrieving Localized Docs
 
 When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be
 used.
@@ -182,7 +151,7 @@ Specify your desired locale by providing the `locale` query parameter directly i
 **`?fallback-locale=`**
 
 Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a
-valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
+valid locale as provided to your base Payload Config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -234,10 +203,9 @@ const posts = await payload.find({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="alert">
+<Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The REST and Local APIs can return all localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
+  The REST and Local APIs can return all Localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
   the <strong>locale</strong> parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
   back as the full objects keyed for each locale instead of the single, translated value.
 </Banner>

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding
 keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for the deep configuration of your application through a simple API.
+Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon.
 
 Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice, to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
 
@@ -58,67 +58,131 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>More:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options). |
-| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts with the `payload` bin function. |
-| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview). |
-| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview). |
-| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app including the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port |
-| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections). |
-| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals). |
-| **`cors`**                 | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
-| **`localization`**         | Opt-in and control how Payload handles the translation of your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization). |
-| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options). |
-| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets. |
-| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload cookies to be accepted from as a form of CSRF protection. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection). |
-| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../getting-started/concepts#depth). |
-| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation. |
-| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. |
-| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar. |
-| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options). |
-| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. Specify `admin`, `api`, `graphQL`, and `graphQLPlayground`. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes). |
-| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview). |
-| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information. |
-| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry). |
-| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests). |
-| **`hooks`**                | Tap into Payload-wide hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview). |
-| **`plugins`**              | An array of Payload plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview). |
-| **`endpoints`**            | An array of custom API endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints). |
-| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins). |
-| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n). |
-| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing. |
-| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here. |
-| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript). |
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options).                                                |
+| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts for Payload to execute.                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                           |
+| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview).                                                                                                      |
+| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app. This includes the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port.            |
+| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections).                                                                                                                  |
+| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals).                                                                                                                          |
+| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More details](#cors). |
+| **`localization`**         | Opt-in to translate your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization).                                                                                                        |
+| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options).                              |
+| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                               |
+| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload to accept cookies from. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection).                                                                 |
+| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                                     |
+| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation.                                                                       |
+| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. [More details](../queries/depth).                          |
+| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                                     |
+| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                             |
+| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes).                                                                               |
+| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview).                                                                                                             |
+| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry).                                                                                                                      |
+| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                            |
+| **`hooks`**                | An array of Root Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`plugins`**              | An array of Plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview).                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`endpoints`**            | An array of Custom Endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n).                                              |
+| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing.                                                                        |
+| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here.                                        |
+| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript).                                                                                                                               |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Some properties are removed from the client-side bundle. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).
 </Banner>
 
+
+### Typescript Config
+
+Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage. These settings are used to auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for your [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals), and to ensure that Payload uses your [Generated Types](../typescript/overview) for all [Local API](../local-api/overview) methods.
+
+To customize the TypeScript settings, use the `typescript` property in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  typescript: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  }
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| --------------- | --------------------- |
+| **`autoGenerate`** | By default, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines. Opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`. [More details](../typescript/overview). |
+| **`declare`**     | By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. Opt out by setting `typescript.declare: false`. |
+| **`outputFile`**  | Control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path. |
+
 ## Config Location
 
-For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including the root current working directory, your `tsconfig`'s `rootDir`, and your `tsconfig`'s `outDir`.
+For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including:
 
-In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and search in the directory specified in `compilerOptions.rootDir` (typically "src").
+1. The root current working directory
+1. The `compilerOptions` in your `tsconfig`*
+1. The `dist` directory*
 
-In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the output directory specified in `compilerOptions.outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, then fallback to the source directory (`compilerOptions.rootDir`), and finally will check the 'dist' directory.
+_\* Config location detection is different between development and production environments. See below for more details._
 
-Please ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured if you want Payload to accurately auto-detect your configuration file location. If `tsconfig.json` does not exist or doesn't specify `rootDir` or `outDir`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured for Payload to auto-detect your config location. If if does not exist, or does not specify the proper `compilerOptions`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
+</Banner>
+
+**Development Mode**
+
+In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and attempt to find the config file specified in the `rootDir`:
+
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+**Production Mode**
+
+In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the `outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, and if not found, will fallback to the `rootDor` directory:
+
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "outDir": "dist",
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+If none was in either location, Payload will finally check the `dist` directory.
 
 ### Customizing the Config Location
 
-In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This is done by using the environment variable `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`. The path you provide via this environment variable can either be absolute or relative to your current working directory. This can be useful in situations where your Payload Config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations.
+In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This can be useful in situations where your config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations. To do this, Payload exposes an [Environment Variable](..environment-variables) to bypass all automatic config detection.
 
-**Example in package.json:**
+To use a custom config location, set the `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` environment variable:
 
 ```json
 {
@@ -128,48 +192,59 @@ In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location
 }
 ```
 
-When `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` is set, Payload will use this path to load the configuration, bypassing all automated detection.
-
-## TypeScript
-
-Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage on your Config's `typescript` property.
-
-**`autoGenerate`**
-
-By default, in Next.js development mode, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines.
-
-You can opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`.
-
-**`declare`**
-
-By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. This promotes strong typing across all of Payload's APIs. However, if you are using your Payload Config in a monorepo sub-package, and you are using it in multiple applications, you might want to disable this automatic declaration and then manually add the `declare` block to a file that you control.
-
-In these cases, you can set `typescript.declare: false` to opt out.
-
-**`outputFile`**
-
-You can control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path.
-
-### Importing Payload Config types
-
-You can import config types as follows:
-
-```ts
-import { Config } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for an incoming Payload Config.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Payload Config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
-```
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` can be either an absolute path, or path relative to your current working directory.
+</Banner>
 
 ## Telemetry
 
 Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload Config.
 
 For more information about what we track, take a look at our [privacy policy](/privacy).
+
+## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)
+
+Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) can be configured with either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, a wildcard string (`*`) to accept incoming requests from any domain, or a object with the following properties:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`origins`** | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
+| **`headers`**  | A list of allowed headers that will be appended in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`. |
+
+Here's an example showing how to allow incoming requests from any domain:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  cors: '*' // highlight-line
+})
+```
+
+Here's an example showing how to append a new header (`x-custom-header`) in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  cors: {
+    origins: ['http://localhost:3000']
+    headers: ['x-custom-header']
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+## TypeScript
+
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your config easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Payload Config, `Config` and `SanitizedConfig`.
+
+The `Config` type represents a raw Payload Config in its full form. Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedConfig` type represents a Payload Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+
+```ts
+import { Config, SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
+```

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfu
 all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
 
 For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions). Migration
-functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your payload local API calls such
-as `payload.create` and database adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
+functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your Payload Local API calls such
+as `payload.create` and Database Adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
 
 Here is an example migration file:
 
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ npm run payload migrate:fresh
 
 ## When to run migrations
 
-Depending on which database adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
+Depending on which Database Adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
 
 In relational databases, migrations will be **required** for non-development database environments. But with MongoDB, you might only need to run migrations once in a while (or never even need them).
 
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ In this case, you can create a migration by running `pnpm payload migrate:create
 
 #### Postgres
 
-In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
+In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload Config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
 
 That means that Postgres users of Payload should become familiar with the entire migration workflow from top to bottom.
 
@@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ But importantly, you do not need to run migrations against your development data
 
 **2 - create a migration**
 
-Once you're done with working in your Payload config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
+Once you're done with working in your Payload Config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
 
 But once you're ready, you can run `pnpm payload migrate:create`, which will perform the following steps for you:
 
-- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload config
+- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload Config
 - We will then create a new migration file in your `/migrations` folder that contains all the SQL necessary to be run
 
-We won't immediately run this migration for you, however. 
+We won't immediately run this migration for you, however.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   Tip: migrations created by Payload are relatively programmatic in nature, so there should not be any surprises, but before you check in the created migration it's a good idea to always double-check the contents of the migration files.
@@ -210,4 +210,4 @@ In the example above, we've specified a `ci` script which we can use as our "bui
 
 This will require that your build pipeline can connect to your database, and it will simply run the `payload migrate` command prior to starting the build process. By calling `payload migrate`, Payload will automatically execute any migrations in your `/migrations` folder that have not yet been executed against your production database, in the order that they were created.
 
-If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload config requires.
+If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload Config requires.

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, he
 To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to
 store your Payload data in MongoDB.
 
-Then from there, pass it to your Payload config as follows:
+Then from there, pass it to your Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'

docs/database/overview.mdx

@@ -6,20 +6,45 @@ keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System,
 desc: With Payload, you bring your own database and own your data. You have full control.
 ---
 
-Payload interacts with your database via the database adapter that you choose. Right now, Payload officially supports two database adapters:
+Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs. Payload is designed to interact with your database through a Database Adapter, which is a thin layer that translates Payload's internal data structures into your database's native data structures.
 
-1. [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) w/ [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
-1. [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) w/ [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+Currently, Payload officially supports the following Database Adapters:
 
-We will be adding support for SQLite and MySQL in the near future using Drizzle ORM.
+- [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) with [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
+- [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) with [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+- Coming soon: SQLite and MySQL using Drizzle.
 
-To use a specific database adapter, you need to install it and configure it according to its own specifications. Visit the documentation for your applicable database adapter to learn more.
+To configure a Database Adapter, use the `db` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
 
-## Selecting a database
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  db: mongooseAdapter({
+    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+  }),
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  The Database Adapter is an external dependency and must be installed in your project separately from Payload. You can find the installation instructions for each Database Adapter in their respective documentation.
+</Banner>
+
+## Selecting a Database
 
 There are several factors to consider when choosing which database technology and hosting option is right for your project and workload. Payload can theoretically support any database, but it's up to you to decide which database to use.
 
-### When to use MongoDB
+There are two main categories of databases to choose from:
+
+- [Non-Relational Databases](#non-relational-databases)
+- [Relational Databases](#relational-databases)
+
+### Non-Relational Databases
 
 If your project has a lot of dynamic fields, and you are comfortable with allowing Payload to enforce data integrity across your documents, MongoDB is a great choice. With it, your Payload documents are stored as _one_ document in your database—no matter if you have localization enabled, how many block or array fields you have, etc. This means that the shape of your data in your database will very closely reflect your field schema, and there is minimal complexity involved in storing or retrieving your data.
 
@@ -27,47 +52,21 @@ You should prefer MongoDB if:
 
 - You prefer simplicity within your database
 - You don't want to deal with keeping production / staging databases in sync via [DDL changes](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_definition_language)
-- Most (or everything) in your project is localized
-- You leverage a lot of array fields, block fields, or `hasMany` select fields and similar
+- Most (or everything) in your project is [Localized](../configuration/localization)
+- You leverage a lot of [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), or `hasMany` [Select](../fields/select) fields
 
-### When to use a relational DB
+### Relational Databases
 
 Many projects might call for more rigid database architecture where the shape of your data is strongly enforced at the database level. For example, if you know the shape of your data and it's relatively "flat", and you don't anticipate it to change often, your workload might suit relational databases like Postgres very well.
 
 You should prefer a relational DB like Postgres if:
 
-- You are comfortable with migration workflows
+- You are comfortable with [Migrations](./migrations)
 - You require enforced data consistency at the database level
 - You have a lot of relationships between collections and require relationships to be enforced
 
-### Differences in Payload features
+## Payload Differences
 
-It's important to note that almost everything Payload does is available in all of our officially supported database adapters, including localization, arrays, blocks, etc.
+It's important to note that nearly every Payload feature is available in all of our officially supported Database Adapters, including [Localization](../configuration/localization), [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), etc. The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point Field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
 
-The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
-
-It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use.
-
-## Configuration
-
-To configure the database for your Payload application, an adapter can be assigned to `config.db`. This property is required within your Payload config.
-
-Here's an example:
-
-```ts
-import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // Your config goes here
-  collections: [
-    // Collections go here
-  ],
-  // Here is where you pass your database adapter
-  // and the adapter will require options specific to itself
-  db: postgresAdapter({
-    pool: {
-      connectionString: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
-    },
-  }),
-})
-```
+It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use based on the requirements of your project. Payload has no opinion on which database you should ultimately choose.

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Postgres
 label: Postgres
 order: 50
-desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter.
+desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
 keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ To use Payload with Postgres, install the package `@payloadcms/db-postgres`. It
 
 It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
 
-To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload config as follows:
+To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
@@ -68,11 +68,11 @@ In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations,
 
 Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
 
-The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
 
 You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
 
-Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload config.
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
 
 ## Migration workflows
 

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managem
 
 Payload has a few email adapters that can be imported to enable email functionality. The [@payloadcms/email-nodemailer](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-nodemailer) package will be the package most will want to install. This package provides an easy way to use [Nodemailer](https://nodemailer.com) for email and won't get in your way for those already familiar.
 
-The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload config. This will allow Payload to send emails for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
+The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload Config. This will allow Payload to send [auth-related emails](../authentication/email) for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
 
 ## Configuration
 
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transpo
 **Example email options using SMTP:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 **Example email options using nodemailer.createTransport:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailer from 'nodemailer'
 
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ You also have the ability to bring your own nodemailer transport. This is an exa
 
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailerSendgrid from 'nodemailer-sendgrid'
 
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The Resend adapter requires an API key to be passed in the options. This can be
 | apiKey | The API key for the Resend service. |
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { resendAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-resend'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Sending Mail
 
-With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
+With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to Payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
 
 ```ts
 // Example of sending an email

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
-  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
 />
 
@@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -36,9 +36,9 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-level hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-level access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                          |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
-| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 | **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
 ### Auto-generated data per block
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ The Admin Panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally al
 `collections/ExampleCollection.js`
 
 ```ts
-import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 const QuoteBlock: Block = {
   slug: 'Quote', // required
@@ -145,5 +145,5 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Block } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Block } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/fields/checkbox.mdx

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox-dark.png"
-  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
 />
 
@@ -23,9 +23,9 @@ keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/code.mdx

@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Code field"
 />
 
@@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 | **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/collapsible.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
 />
 
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Date field"
 />
 
@@ -28,9 +28,9 @@ This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepic
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the admin panel via the `date` property.
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the Admin Panel via the `date` property.
 
 | Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
 | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ When only `pickerAppearance` is set, an equivalent format will be rendered in th
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/email.mdx

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Email field"
 />
 
@@ -24,9 +24,9 @@ keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/group.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Group field"
 />
 
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`label`**            | Used as a heading in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
@@ -45,14 +45,14 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 **`hideGutter`**
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, d
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a JSON field"
 />
 
@@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`jsonSchema`**       | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)                                          |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ If you only provide a URL to a schema, Payload will fetch the desired schema if
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/number.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Number field"
 />
 
@@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -2,13 +2,26 @@
 title: Fields Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define access control and validation.
+desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define Access Control and Validation.
 keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Both [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals) use fields to define the shape of the data that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
+Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
-There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validations), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
+There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validation), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
+
+To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [ // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  ]
+}
+```
 
 <Banner type="success">
   You can fully customize the appearance and behavior of all fields within the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/fields).
@@ -130,6 +143,7 @@ The following field names are forbidden and cannot be used:
   - `__v`
   - `salt`
   - `hash`
+  - `file`
 
 ### Field-level Hooks
 
@@ -221,7 +235,7 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
 </Banner>
 
-### Validations
+### Validation
 
 Fields are automatically validated based on their [Field Type](#field-types) and other [Field Options](#field-options) such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints. If needed, however, field validations can be customized or entirely replaced by providing your own custom validation functions.
 
@@ -361,6 +375,8 @@ export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   The Custom ID Fields can only be of type [`Number`](./number) or [`Text`](./text).
+
+  Custom ID fields with type `text` must not contain `/` or `.` characters.
 </Banner>
 
 ## TypeScript

docs/fields/point.mdx

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configurati
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Point field"
 />
 
@@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent po
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                   |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                          |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Radio field"
 />
 
@@ -27,16 +27,16 @@ keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
 | **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ The `layout` property allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally o
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
 />
 
@@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                    |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                    |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                   |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                      |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                         |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                   |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                            |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                 |
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
   <br />
-  The [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
+  The [Depth](../queries/depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
   related documents that are returned by the API.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 ## Example
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/rich-text.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manag
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
 />
 
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
 | **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.           |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                              |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control) |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.           |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.        |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
 
 **`hideGutter`**
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
 
 **`rtl`**
 

docs/fields/row.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Row field"
 />
 
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Select field"
 />
 
@@ -29,17 +29,17 @@ keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.   |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                    |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                       |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                              |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
 | **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                      |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/tabs.mdx

@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Tabs field type used to separate Hero fields from Page Layout"
 />
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
 />
 
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `t
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/textarea.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Textarea field and read-only Textarea field"
 />
 
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `t
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/ui.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: UI Field
 label: UI
 order: 200
-desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the admin panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
+desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the Admin Panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
 keywords: custom field, react component, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/upload.mdx

@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Upload field"
 />
 
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 | **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
 | **`*relationTo`** \*   | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
 | **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
-| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
+| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](../queries/depth)                                              |
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/getting-started/concepts.mdx

@@ -6,74 +6,64 @@ desc: Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Key concept
 keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with the following:
+Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of high-level concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with these concepts in order to establish a common language and understanding when discussing Payload.
 
 ## Config
 
-<Banner type="info">The Payload config is where you configure everything that Payload does.</Banner>
+The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does. It allows for the deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon. [More details](../configuration/overview).
 
-By default, the Payload config lives in the root folder of your code and is named `payload.config.ts`, but you can customize its name and where you store it. You can write full functions and even full React components right into your config.
+## Database
+
+Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs through what is known as a Database Adapter. [More details](../database/overview).
 
 ## Collections
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  A Collection represents a type of content that Payload will store and can contain many documents.
-</Banner>
-
-Collections define the shape of your data as well as all functionalities attached to that data. They will contain one or many "documents", all corresponding with the same fields and functionalities that you define.
-
-They can represent anything you can store in a database - for example - pages, posts, users, people, orders, categories, events, customers, transactions, and anything else your app needs.
+A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. Each Collection is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/collections).
 
 ## Globals
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  A Global is a "one-off" piece of content that is perfect for storing navigational structures,
-  themes, top-level meta data, and more.
-</Banner>
-
-Globals are in many ways similar to Collections, but there is only ever **one** instance of a Global, whereas Collections can contain many documents.
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. Each Global is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/globals).
 
 ## Fields
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Collections and Globals both use Fields to define the
-  shape of the data that they store.
-</Banner>
-
-Payload comes with [many different field types](../fields/overview) that give you a ton of flexibility while designing your API. Each Field type has its own potential properties that allow you to customize how they work.
+Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the Admin Panel. [More details](../fields/overview).
 
 ## Hooks
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Hooks are where you can "tie in" to existing Payload actions to perform your own additional logic
-  or modify how Payload operates altogether.
-</Banner>
+Hooks allow you to execute your own side effects during specific events of the Document lifecycle, such as before read, after create, etc. [More details](../hooks/overview).
 
-Hooks are an extremely powerful concept and are central to extending and customizing your app. Payload provides a wide variety of hooks which you can utilize. For example, imagine if you'd like to send an email every time a document is created in your Orders collection. To do so, you can add an `afterChange` hook function to your Orders collection that receives the Order data and allows you to send an email accordingly.
+## Authentication
 
-There are many more potential reasons to use Hooks. For more, visit the [Hooks documentation](/docs/hooks/overview).
+Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the Admin Panel, all well as your own external applications. [More details](../authentication/overview).
 
 ## Access Control
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Access Control refers to Payload's system of defining who can do what to your API.
+Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, such as read, update, etc., as well as what they can and cannot see within the Admin Panel. [More details](../access-control/overview).
+
+## Admin Panel
+
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, fully type-safe interface to manage your users and data. The Admin Panel is a React application built using the Next.js App Router. [More details](../admin/overview).
+
+## Retrieving Data
+
+Everything Payload does (create, read, update, delete, login, logout, etc.) is exposed to you via three APIs:
+
+- [Local API](#local-api) - Extremely fast, direct-to-database access
+- [REST API](#rest-api) - Standard HTTP endpoints for querying and mutating data
+- [GraphQL](#graphql) - A full GraphQL API with a GraphQL Playground
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  All of these APIs share the exact same query language. [More details](../queries/overview).
 </Banner>
 
-Access Control is extremely powerful but easy and intuitive to manage. You can easily define your own full-blown RBAC (role-based access control) or any other access control pattern that your scenario requires. No conventions or structure is forced on you whatsoever.
+### Local API
 
-For more, visit the [Access Control documentation](/docs/access-control/overview).
+By far one of the most powerful aspects of Payload is the fact that it gives you direct-to-database access to your data through the [Local API](../local-api/overview). It's _extremely_ fast and does not incur any typical HTTP overhead—you query your database directly in Node.js.
 
-## Retrieving Payload data
+The Local API is written in TypeScript, and so it is strongly typed and extremely nice to use. It works anywhere on the server, including custom Next.js Routes, Payload Hooks, Payload Access Control, and React Server Components.
 
-Everything Payload does (create, read, update, delete, login, logout, etc) is exposed to you via three APIs:
-
-**1 - Payload's Local API**
-
-By far one of the most powerful aspects of Payload is the fact that it gives you direct-to-database access to your data. It's _extremely_ fast and does not incur any typical REST API / GraphQL / HTTP overhead - you query your database directly in Node.js / TypeScript.
-
-Everything is strongly typed and it's extremely nice to use. It works anywhere on the server, including custom Next.js route handlers, Payload hooks, Payload access control, and React Server Components.
-
-Here's a quick example of a React Server Component fetching page data with Payload's Local API:
+Here's a quick example of a React Server Component fetching data using the Local API:
 
 ```tsx
 import React from 'react'
@@ -104,191 +94,65 @@ const MyServerComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-For more docs about the Payload Local API, [click here](/docs/beta/local-api/overview).
+<Banner type="info">
+  For more information about the Local API, [click here](../local-api/overview).
+</Banner>
 
-**2 - The REST API**
+### REST API
 
-By default, the Payload REST API will be mounted automatically for you at the `/api` path of your app.
+By default, the Payload [REST API](../rest-api/overview) is mounted automatically for you at the `/api` path of your app.
 
-For example, if you have a collection with the `slug` as `pages`, you'd fetch pages via `http://localhost:3000/api/pages`.
-
-Here's an example:
+For example, if you have a Collection called `pages`:
 
 ```ts
-const pages = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
-  // Include cookies, like the Payload auth token
-  credentials: 'include',
-}).then((res) => res.json())
+fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/pages') // highlight-line
+  .then((res) => res.json())
+  .then((data) => console.log(data))
 ```
 
-For a full list of REST API endpoints, including examples, [click here](/docs/beta/rest-api/overview).
+<Banner type="info">
+  For more information about the REST API, [click here](../rest-api/overview).
+</Banner>
 
-**3 - GraphQL**
+### GraphQL API
 
-Payload automatically exposes GraphQL queries and mutations for everything it does.
-
-By default, you'll find the GraphQL route handler in your `/app/(payload)/api/graphql` folder, which makes the GraphQL endpoint available by default at `http://localhost:3000/api/graphql`.
-
-You'll also find a full GraphQL Playground which can be accessible via `http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground`.
+Payload automatically exposes GraphQL queries and mutations through a dedicated [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). By default, the GraphQL route handler is mounted at the `/api/graphql` path of your app. You'll also find a full GraphQL Playground which can be accessible at the `/api/graphql-playground` path of your app.
 
 You can use any GraphQL client with Payload's GraphQL endpoint. Here are a few packages:
 
 - [`graphql-request`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/graphql-request) - a very lightweight GraphQL client
 - [`@apollo/client`](https://www.apollographql.com/docs/react/api/core/ApolloClient/) - an industry-standard GraphQL client with lots of nice features
 
-If you don't use GraphQL, you can delete those files! But if you do, you'll find that GraphQL is a first-class API in Payload. Either way, the overhead of GraphQL is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down / affect Payload outside of those endpoints themselves.
-
-For more docs on GraphQL, [click here](/docs/beta/graphql/overview). 
-
-## Depth
-
 <Banner type="info">
-  "Depth" gives you control over how many levels down related documents should be automatically
-  populated when retrieved.
+  For more information about the GraphQL API, [click here](../graphql/overview).
 </Banner>
 
-You can specify population `depth` via query parameter in the REST API and by an option in the local API. _Depth has no effect in the GraphQL API, because there, depth is based on the shape of your queries._
-It is also possible to limit the depth for specific `relation` and `upload` fields using the `maxDepth` property in your configuration.
-**For example, let's look at the following Collections:** `departments`, `users`, `posts`
+## Package Structure
 
-```
-// type: 'relationship' fields are equal to 1 depth level
-
-{
-	slug: 'posts',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'title',
-			type: 'text',
-		},
-		{
-			name: 'author',
-			label: 'Post Author',
-			type: 'relationship',
-			relationTo: 'users',
-		}
-	]
-}
-
-{
-	slug: 'users',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'email',
-			type: 'email',
-		},
-		{
-			name: 'department'
-			type: 'relationship',
-			relationTo: 'departments'
-		}
-	]
-}
-
-{
-	slug: 'departments',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'name'
-			type: 'text',
-		}
-	]
-}
-```
-
-If you were to query the Posts endpoint at, say, `http://localhost:3000/api/posts?depth=1`, you will retrieve Posts with populations one level deep. This depth parameter can be thought of as N, where N is the number of levels you want to populate. To populate one level further, you would simply specify N+1 as the depth. A returned result may look like the following:
-
-```
-// ?depth=1
-
-{
-  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
-  title: 'This post sucks',
-  author: {
-    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
-    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
-    department: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15'
-  }
-}
-```
-
-Notice how the `user.author` is fully populated, but `user.author.department` is left as a document ID? That's because the User collection counted as the first level of `depth` and got populated—but then prevented any further populations from taking place.
-
-To populate `user.author.department` in it's entirety you could specify `?depth=2` or _higher_.
-
-```
-// ?depth=2
-
-{
-  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
-  title: 'This post sucks',
-  author: {
-    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
-    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
-    department: {
-      id: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15',
-      name: 'Marvel'
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Field-level max depth
-
-Fields like relationships or uploads can have a `maxDepth` property that limits the depth of the population for that field. Here are some examples:
-
-Depth: 10
-Current depth when field is accessed: 1
-`maxDepth`: undefined
-
-In this case, the field would be populated to 9 levels of population.
-
-Depth: 10
-Current depth when field is accessed: 0
-`maxDepth`: 2
-
-In this case, the field would be populated to 2 levels of population, despite there being a remaining depth of 8.
-
-Depth: 10
-Current depth when field is accessed: 2
-`maxDepth`: 1
-
-In this case, the field would not be populated, as the current depth (2) has exceeded the `maxDepth` for this field (1).
+Payload is abstracted into a set of dedicated packages to keep the core `payload` package as lightweight as possible. This allows you to only install the parts of Payload based on your unique project requirements.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  When access control on collections prevents relationship fields from populating, the API response
-  will contain the relationship id instead of the full document.
-</Banner>
-
-## Package organization
-
-Payload is abstracted into a set of dedicated packages, and it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with what each one is responsible for.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br/>
-  Version numbers of all official Payload packages are kept in sync - and you should always make sure that you use matching versions for all official Payload packages. 
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Version numbers of all official Payload packages are always published in sync. You should make sure that you always use matching versions for all official Payload packages.
 </Banner>
 
 `payload`
 
-The `payload` package is where core business logic for Payload lives. You can think of Payload as an ORM with superpowers - it contains the logic for all Payload "operations" like `find`, `create`, `update`, and `delete`. It executes access control, hooks, validation, and more.
+The `payload` package is where core business logic for Payload lives. You can think of Payload as an ORM with superpowers—it contains the logic for all Payload "operations" like `find`, `create`, `update`, and `delete` and exposes a [Local API](../local-api/overview). It executes [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Validation](../fields/overview#validation), and more.
 
-Payload itself is extremely compact, and can be used in any Node environment. As long as you have `payload` installed and you have access to your Payload config, you can query and mutate your database directly without going through an unnecessary HTTP layer.
+Payload itself is extremely compact, and can be used in any Node environment. As long as you have `payload` installed and you have access to your Payload Config, you can query and mutate your database directly without going through an unnecessary HTTP layer.
 
 Payload also contains all TypeScript definitions, which can be imported from `payload` directly.
 
 Here's how to import some common Payload types:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig, Field, GlobalConfig, Config } from 'payload'
+import { Config, CollectionConfig, GlobalConfig, Field } from 'payload'
 ```
 
 `@payloadcms/next`
 
-Whereas Payload itself is responsible for direct database access, and control over Payload business logic, the `@payloadcms/next` package is responsible for the admin panel and the entire HTTP layer (REST, GraphQL) that Payload exposes. 
+Whereas Payload itself is responsible for direct database access, and control over Payload business logic, the `@payloadcms/next` package is responsible for the Admin Panel and the entire HTTP layer that Payload exposes, including the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
 
 `@payloadcms/graphql`
 
@@ -296,14 +160,17 @@ All of Payload's GraphQL functionality is abstracted into a separate package. Pa
 
 `@payloadcms/ui`
 
-This is the UI library that Payload's admin panel uses. All components are exported from this package and can be re-used as you build extensions to the Payload admin UI, or want to use Payload components in your own React apps. Some exports are server components and some are client components.
+This is the UI library that Payload's Admin Panel uses. All components are exported from this package and can be re-used as you build extensions to the Payload admin UI, or want to use Payload components in your own React apps. Some exports are server components and some are client components.
 
 `@payloadcms/db-postgres`, `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`
 
-You can choose which database adapter you'd like to use for your project, and no matter which you choose, the entire data layer for Payload is contained within these packages. You can only use one at a time for any given project.
+You can choose which Database Adapter you'd like to use for your project, and no matter which you choose, the entire data layer for Payload is contained within these packages. You can only use one at a time for any given project.
 
 `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, `@payloadcms/richtext-slate`
 
 Payload's Rich Text functionality is abstracted into separate packages and if you want to enable Rich Text in your project, you'll need to install one of these packages. We recommend Lexical for all new projects, and this is where Payload will focus its efforts on from this point, but Slate is still supported if you have already built with it.
 
-Rich Text is entirely optional and you may not need it for your project.
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Rich Text is entirely optional and you may not need it for your project.
+</Banner>

docs/getting-started/installation.mdx

@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Payload requires the following software:
 - Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB or Postgres)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Before proceeding any further, please ensure that you have the above requirements met.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ To quickly scaffold a new Payload app in the fastest way possible, you can use [
 npx create-payload-app@beta
 ```
 
-Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside.
+Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside. You can then start [configuring your application](../configuration/overview).
 
 ## Adding to an existing app
 
@@ -34,58 +35,63 @@ Adding Payload to an existing Next.js app is super straightforward. You can eith
 
 If you don't have a Next.js app already, but you still want to start a project from a blank Next.js app, you can create a new Next.js app using `npx create-next-app` - and then just follow the steps below to install Payload.
 
-#### 1 - install the relevant packages
+#### 1. Install the relevant packages
 
-First, you'll want to add the required Payload packages to your project and can do so by running the command below (swap out `pnpm` for your package manager). Note that if you are using NPM, you might need to install using legacy peer deps (`npm i --legacy-peer-deps`).
+First, you'll want to add the required Payload packages to your project and can do so by running the command below:
 
-```
+```bash
 pnpm i payload@beta @payloadcms/next@beta @payloadcms/richtext-lexical@beta sharp graphql
 ```
 
-You'll also need to install the database adapter that you'd like to use. You have the option of Postgres (`@payloadcms/db-postgres`) or MongoDB (`@payloadcms/db-mongodb`).
-
-#### 2 - copy Payload files into your Next.js app folder
-
-Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run.
-
-The files that Payload needs to have in your `/app` folder do not regenerate, and will never change. Once you slot them in, you never have to revisit them. They are not meant to be edited and simply import Payload dependencies from `@payloadcms/next` for the REST / GraphQL API and Payload admin UI.
-
-You can copy the Payload `/app` folder files from the Payload blank template on GitHub:
-
-```
-https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/blank-3.0/src/app/(payload)
-```
-
-Notice how the Payload files are all kept within the `(payload)` [Route Group](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/route-groups)? That's so that the Payload admin UI can have its own separate [Root Layout](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/pages-and-layouts#root-layout-required) which will allow it to not interfere whatsoever with an existing Next.js app if you have one. 
-
 <Banner type="warning">
-  You may need to copy all of your existing frontend files, including your existing root layout, into its own newly created route group.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Swap out `pnpm` for your package manager. If you are using NPM, you might need to install using legacy peer deps: `npm i --legacy-peer-deps`.
 </Banner>
 
-Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
+Next, install a [Database Adapter](/docs/database/overview). Payload requires a Database Adapter to establish a database connection. Payload works with all types of databases, but the most common are MongoDB and Postgres.
 
-```
-/app
-  -- (payload) // This is the Payload route group
-     -- layout.tsx // Payload's root layout
-     -- admin // The Payload admin UI
-     -- api // Payload's REST / GraphQL handlers
-     -- custom.scss // Define custom SCSS for the Payload admin here
-  -- (my-app) // this is where your existing app goes
-     -- layout.tsx // move your existing root layout here
-     -- page.tsx // your existing home page
-     -- ...etc // whatever else you have
+To install a Database Adapter, you can run **one** of the following commands:
+
+- To install the [MongoDB Adapter](../database/mongodb), run:
+    ```bash
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-mongodb
+    ```
+
+- To install the [Postgres Adapter](../database/postgres), run:
+    ```bash
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-postgres
+    ```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  New [Database Adapters](/docs/database/overview) are becoming available every day. Check the docs for the most up-to-date list of what's available.
+</Banner>
+
+#### 2. Copy Payload files into your Next.js app folder
+
+Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run. You can copy these files from the [Blank Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/blank-3.0/src/app/(payload)) on GitHub. Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
+
+```plaintext
+app/
+├─ (payload)/
+├── // Payload files
+├─ (my-app)/
+├── // Your app files
 ```
 
-You can name the `(my-app)` folder anything you want. The name does not matter and will just be used to clarify your directory structure for yourself. Common names might be `(frontend)`, `(app)`, or similar. [Check out the Admin documentation](/docs/beta/admin/overview) for more information.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  You may need to copy all of your existing frontend files, including your existing root layout, into its own newly created [Route Group](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/route-groups), i.e. `(my-app)`.
+</Banner>
 
-#### 3 - add the Payload plugin to your Next.js config
+The files that Payload needs to have in your `/app` folder do not regenerate, and will never change. Once you slot them in, you never have to revisit them. They are not meant to be edited and simply import Payload dependencies from `@payloadcms/next` for the REST / GraphQL API and Admin Panel.
 
-Payload has a plugin that it uses to ensure Next.js compatibility with some of the packages Payload relies on, like `mongodb` or `drizzle-kit`.
+You can name the `(my-app)` folder anything you want. The name does not matter and will just be used to clarify your directory structure for yourself. Common names might be `(frontend)`, `(app)`, or similar. [More details](../admin/overview).
 
-You need to import the `withPayload` plugin in your `next.config.js` file and wrap your config with it.
+#### 3. Add the Payload Plugin to your Next.js config
 
-Here's an example of what your Next.js config should look like after you've imported the Payload plugin:
+Payload has a Next.js plugin that it uses to ensure compatibility with some of the packages Payload relies on, like `mongodb` or `drizzle-kit`.
+
+To add the Payload Plugin, use `withPayload` in your `next.config.js`:
 
 ```js
 import { withPayload } from '@payloadcms/next/withPayload'
@@ -100,12 +106,15 @@ const nextConfig = {
 
 // Make sure you wrap your `nextConfig`
 // with the `withPayload` plugin
-export default withPayload(nextConfig)
+export default withPayload(nextConfig) // highlight-line
 ```
 
-**Important:** Payload is a fully ESM project, and that means the `withPayload` function is an EcmaScript module.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Payload is a fully ESM project, and that means the `withPayload` function is an ECMAScript module.
+</Banner>
 
-To import it, you need to make sure your `next.config` file is set up to use ESM.
+To import the Payload Plugin, you need to make sure your `next.config` file is set up to use ESM.
 
 You can do this in one of two ways:
 
@@ -114,11 +123,11 @@ You can do this in one of two ways:
 
 In either case, all `require`s and `export`s in your `next.config` file will need to be converted to `import` / `export` if they are not set up that way already.
 
-#### 4 - create a Payload config and add it to your TypeScript config
+#### 4. Create a Payload Config and add it to your TypeScript config
 
-Finally, you need to create a barebones Payload config.
+Finally, you need to create a [Payload Config](../configuration/overview). Generally the Payload Config is located at the root of your repository, or next to your `/app` folder, and is named `payload.config.ts`.
 
-Generally the Payload config is located at the root of your repository, or next to your `/app` folder, and is named `payload.config.ts`. Here's what Payload needs at a bare minimum:
+Here's what Payload needs at a bare minimum:
 
 ```ts
 import sharp from 'sharp'
@@ -133,18 +142,16 @@ export default buildConfig({
   // Define and configure your collections in this array
   collections: [],
 
-  // Your Payload secret - should be a complex and secure string, unguessable  
+  // Your Payload secret - should be a complex and secure string, unguessable
   secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET || '',
-
-  // Whichever database adapter you're using should go here
-  // Mongoose is shown as an example, but you can also use Postgres 
+  // Whichever Database Adapter you're using should go here
+  // Mongoose is shown as an example, but you can also use Postgres
   db: mongooseAdapter({
     url: process.env.DATABASE_URI || '',
   }),
-
   // If you want to resize images, crop, set focal point, etc.
   // make sure to install it and pass it to the config.
-  // This is optional - if you don't need to do these things, 
+  // This is optional - if you don't need to do these things,
   // you don't need it!
   sharp,
 })
@@ -152,7 +159,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 Although this is just the bare minimum config, there are _many_ more options that you can control here. To reference the full config and all of its options, [click here](/docs/configuration/overview).
 
-Once you have your config created, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` that points to your config:
+Once you have a Payload Config, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` that points to it:
 
 ```json
 {
@@ -166,7 +173,7 @@ Once you have your config created, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` th
 }
 ```
 
-#### 5 - fire it up!
+#### 5. Fire it up!
 
 After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going. By default, the Next.js dev script is `pnpm dev` (or `npm run dev` if using NPM).
 

docs/getting-started/what-is-payload.mdx

@@ -11,11 +11,11 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
   title="Payload Introduction - Closing the Gap Between Headless CMS and Application Frameworks"
 />
 
-**Payload is the Next.js fullstack framework.** Write a Payload config and instantly get:
+**Payload is the Next.js fullstack framework.** Write a Payload Config and instantly get:
 
-- A full admin panel using React server / client components, matching the shape of your data and completely extensible with your own React components
+- A full Admin Panel using React server / client components, matching the shape of your data and completely extensible with your own React components
 - Automatic database schema, including direct DB access and ownership, with migrations, transactions, proper indexing, and more
-- Instant REST, GraphQL, and straight-to-DB Node APIs
+- Instant REST, GraphQL, and straight-to-DB Node.js APIs
 - Authentication which can be used in your own apps
 - A deeply customizable access control pattern
 - File storage and image management tools like cropping / focal point selection
@@ -30,25 +30,27 @@ No matter what you're building, Payload will give you backend superpowers. It ca
 
 It's fully open source with an MIT license and you can self-host anywhere that you can run a Node app. You can also deploy serverless to hosts like Vercel, right inside your existing Next.js app folder.
 
+### Code-first and version controlled
+
+In Payload, there are no "click ops" - as in clicking around in an Admin Panel to define your schema. In Payload, everything is done the right way—code-first and version controlled like a proper backend. But once developers define how Payload should work, non-technical users can independently make use of its Admin Panel to manage whatever they need to without having to know code whatsoever.
+
 ### Fully extensible
 
 Even in spite of how much you get out of the box, you still have full control over every aspect of your app - be it database, admin UI, or anything else. Every part of Payload has been designed to be extensible and customizable with modern TypeScript / React. And you'll fully understand the code that you write.
 
-In Payload, there are no "click ops" - as in clicking around in an admin panel to define your schema. In Payload, everything is done the right way—code-first and version controlled like a proper backend. But once developers define how Payload should work, non-technical users can independently make use of its admin panel to manage whatever they need to without having to know code whatsoever.
+## Use Cases
 
-## Use cases
-
-Payload started as a headless Content Management System (CMS), but since, we've seen our community leverage Payload in ways far outside of simply managing pages and blog posts. It's grown into a full-stack TypeScript app framework. 
+Payload started as a headless Content Management System (CMS), but since, we've seen our community leverage Payload in ways far outside of simply managing pages and blog posts. It's grown into a full-stack TypeScript app framework.
 
 Large enterprises use Payload to power significant internal tools, retailers power their entire storefronts without the need for headless Shopify, and massive amounts of digital assets are stored + managed within Payload. Of course, websites large and small still use Payload for content management as well.
 
-### As a CMS
+### Headless CMS
 
 The biggest barrier in large web projects cited by marketers is engineering. On the flip side, engineers say the opposite. This is a big problem that has yet to be solved even though we have countless CMS options.
 
 Payload has restored a little love back into the dev / marketer equation with features like Live Preview, redirects, form builders, visual editing, static A/B testing, and more. But even with all this focus on marketing efficiency, we aren't compromising on the developer experience. That way engineers and marketers alike can be proud of the products they build.
 
-If you're building a website and your frontend is on Next.js, then Payload is a no-brainer. 
+If you're building a website and your frontend is on Next.js, then Payload is a no-brainer.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   Instead of going out and signing up for a SaaS vendor that makes it so you have to manage two completely separate concerns, with little to no native connection back and forth, just install Payload in your existing Next.js repo and instantly get a full CMS.
@@ -60,7 +62,7 @@ Get started with Payload as a CMS using our official Website template:
 npx create-payload-app@latest -t website
 ```
 
-### For enterprise tools
+### Enterprise Tool
 
 When a large organization starts up a new software initiative, there's a lot of plumbing to take care of.
 
@@ -71,7 +73,7 @@ When a large organization starts up a new software initiative, there's a lot of
 - Implement a migrations workflow for the database as it changes over time
 - Integrate with other third party solutions by crafting a system of webhooks or similar
 
-And then there's the admin panel. Most enterprise tools require an admin UI, and building one from scratch can be the most time-consuming aspect of any new enterprise tool. There are off-the-shelf packages for app frameworks like Rails, but often the customization is so involved that using Material UI or similar from scratch might be better.
+And then there's the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Most enterprise tools require an admin UI, and building one from scratch can be the most time-consuming aspect of any new enterprise tool. There are off-the-shelf packages for app frameworks like Rails, but often the customization is so involved that using Material UI or similar from scratch might be better.
 
 Then there are no-code admin builders that could be used. However, wiring up access control and the connection to the data layer, with proper version control, makes this a challenging task as well.
 
@@ -83,9 +85,9 @@ Generally, the best place to start for a new enterprise tool is with a blank can
 npx create-payload-app@latest -t blank
 ```
 
-### Headless commerce
+### Headless Commerce
 
-Companies who prioritize UX generally run into frontend constraints with traditional commerce vendors. These companies will then opt for frontend frameworks like Next.js which allow them to fine-tune their user experience as much as possible—promoting conversions, personalizing experiences, and optimizing for SEO. 
+Companies who prioritize UX generally run into frontend constraints with traditional commerce vendors. These companies will then opt for frontend frameworks like Next.js which allow them to fine-tune their user experience as much as possible—promoting conversions, personalizing experiences, and optimizing for SEO.
 
 But the challenge with using something like Next.js for headless commerce is that in order for non-technical users to manage the storefront, you instantly need to pair a headless commerce product with a headless CMS. Then, your editors need to bounce back and forth between different admin UIs for different functionality. The code required to seamlessly glue them together on the frontend becomes overly complex.
 
@@ -99,7 +101,7 @@ Payload's official Ecommerce template gives you everything you need for a storef
 npx create-payload-app@latest -t ecommerce
 ```
 
-### Digital asset management
+### Digital Asset Management
 
 Payload's API-first tagging, sorting, and querying engine lends itself perfectly to all types of content that a CMS might ordinarily store, but these strong fundamentals also make it a formidable Digital Asset Management (DAM) tool as well.
 
@@ -109,6 +111,10 @@ Payload flattens CMS and DAM into a single tool that makes no compromises on eit
 
 [Click here](https://payloadcms.com/use-cases/digital-asset-management) for more information on how to get started with Payload as a DAM.
 
+## Choosing a Framework
+
+Payload is a great choice for applications of all sizes and types, but it might not be the right choice for every project. Here are some guidelines to help you decide if Payload is the right choice for your project.
+
 ### When Payload might be for you
 
 - If data ownership and privacy are important to you, and you don't want to allow another proprietary SaaS vendor to host and own your data
@@ -121,7 +127,7 @@ Payload flattens CMS and DAM into a single tool that makes no compromises on eit
 
 - If you can manage your project fully with code, and don't need an admin UI
 - If you are building a website that fits within the limits a tool like Webflow or Framer
-- If you already have a full database and just need to visualize the data somehow 
+- If you already have a full database and just need to visualize the data somehow
 - If you are confident that you won't need code / data ownership at any point in the future
 
 Ready to get started? First, let's review some high-level concepts that are used in Payload.

docs/graphql/extending.mdx

@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 title: Adding your own Queries and Mutations
 label: Custom Queries and Mutations
 order: 20
-desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload config by following these instructions.
+desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload Config by following these instructions.
 keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, custom, queries, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 You can add your own GraphQL queries and mutations to Payload, making use of all the types that Payload has defined for you.
 
-To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload config as follows:
+To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload Config as follows:
 
 | Config Path         | Description                                                                 |
 | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |

docs/graphql/overview.mdx

@@ -8,13 +8,13 @@ keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, config, configuration, documentation, C
 
 In addition to its REST and Local APIs, Payload ships with a fully featured and extensible GraphQL API.
 
-By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload config.
+By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload Config.
 
 The labels you provide for your Collections and Globals are used to name the GraphQL types that are created to correspond to your config. Special characters and spaces are removed.
 
 ## GraphQL Options
 
-At the top of your Payload config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
+At the top of your Payload Config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                                     |
 | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 
 ## Preferences
 
-User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the admin panel are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
+User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
 
 **Payload will open the following query:**
 
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the admin panel are als
 
 ## GraphQL Playground
 
-GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload config.
+GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload Config.
 
 You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation to use the Playground as an authenticated user.
 

docs/hooks/collections.mdx

@@ -6,43 +6,36 @@ desc: You can add hooks to any Collection, several hook types are available incl
 keywords: hooks, collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Collections feature the ability to define the following hooks:
+Collection Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents within a specific [Collection](../configuration/collections). They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle.
 
-- [beforeOperation](#beforeoperation)
-- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
-- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
-- [afterChange](#afterchange)
-- [beforeRead](#beforeread)
-- [afterRead](#afterread)
-- [beforeDelete](#beforedelete)
-- [afterDelete](#afterdelete)
-- [afterOperation](#afteroperation)
-
-Additionally, `auth`-enabled collections feature the following hooks:
-
-- [beforeLogin](#beforelogin)
-- [afterLogin](#afterlogin)
-- [afterLogout](#afterlogout)
-- [afterRefresh](#afterrefresh)
-- [afterMe](#afterme)
-- [afterForgotPassword](#afterforgotpassword)
-- [refresh](#refresh)
-- [me](#me)
-
-## Config
-
-All collection Hook properties accept arrays of synchronous or asynchronous functions. Each Hook type receives specific arguments and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
-
-`collections/exampleHooks.js`
+To add Hooks to a Collection, use the `hooks` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
 
-export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'example-hooks',
-  fields: [
-    { name: 'name', type: 'text'},
-  ],
+export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  hooks: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can also set hooks on the field-level to isolate hook logic to specific fields. [More details](./fields).
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+All Collection Hooks accept an array of [synchronous or asynchronous functions](./overview#async-vs-synchronous). Each Collection Hook receives specific arguments based on its own type, and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
   hooks: {
     beforeOperation: [(args) => {...}],
     beforeValidate: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -54,7 +47,7 @@ export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
     afterDelete: [(args) => {...}],
     afterOperation: [(args) => {...}],
 
-    // Auth-enabled hooks
+    // Auth-enabled Hooks
     beforeLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogout: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -64,6 +57,7 @@ export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
     refresh: [(args) => {...}],
     me: [(args) => {...}],
   },
+  // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
@@ -77,14 +71,23 @@ Available Collection operations include `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, `l
 import type { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeOperationHook: CollectionBeforeOperationHook = async ({
-  args, // original arguments passed into the operation
-  operation, // name of the operation
-  req, // full Request object
+  args,
+  operation,
+  req,
 }) => {
   return args // return modified operation arguments as necessary
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeOperation` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeValidate
 
 Runs before the `create` and `update` operations. This hook allows you to add or format data before the incoming data is validated server-side.
@@ -99,15 +102,23 @@ Please do note that this does not run before the client-side validation. If you
 import type { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: CollectionBeforeValidateHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeValidate` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeChange
 
 Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within `create` and `update` operations. At this stage, you can be confident that the data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field validations. You can optionally modify the shape of data to be saved.
@@ -116,15 +127,23 @@ Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within `create`
 import type { CollectionBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeChangeHook: CollectionBeforeChangeHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterChange
 
 After a document is created or updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. This hook is helpful to recalculate statistics such as total sales within a global, syncing user profile changes to a CRM, and more.
@@ -133,15 +152,23 @@ After a document is created or updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. This hook i
 import type { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
-  previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | The Document before changes were applied. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeRead
 
 Runs before `find` and `findByID` operations are transformed for output by `afterRead`. This hook fires before hidden fields are removed and before localized fields are flattened into the requested locale. Using this Hook will provide you with all locales and all hidden fields via the `doc` argument.
@@ -150,14 +177,22 @@ Runs before `find` and `findByID` operations are transformed for output by `afte
 import type { CollectionBeforeReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeReadHook: CollectionBeforeReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
-  query, // JSON formatted query
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterRead
 
 Runs as the last step before documents are returned. Flattens locales, hides protected fields, and removes fields that users do not have access to.
@@ -166,15 +201,22 @@ Runs as the last step before documents are returned. Flattens locales, hides pro
 import type { CollectionAfterReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterReadHook: CollectionAfterReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
-  query, // JSON formatted query
-  findMany, // boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeDelete
 
 Runs before the `delete` operation. Returned values are discarded.
@@ -183,11 +225,20 @@ Runs before the `delete` operation. Returned values are discarded.
 import type { CollectionBeforeDeleteHook } from 'payload';
 
 const beforeDeleteHook: CollectionBeforeDeleteHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  id, // id of document to delete
+  req,
+  id,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeDelete` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`id`**               | The ID of the Document being deleted. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterDelete
 
 Runs immediately after the `delete` operation removes records from the database. Returned values are discarded.
@@ -196,12 +247,22 @@ Runs immediately after the `delete` operation removes records from the database.
 import type { CollectionAfterDeleteHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterDeleteHook: CollectionAfterDeleteHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  id, // id of document to delete
-  doc, // deleted document
+  req,
+  id,
+  doc,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterDelete` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`id`**          | The ID of the Document that was deleted. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterOperation
 
 The `afterOperation` hook can be used to modify the result of operations or execute side-effects that run after an operation has completed.
@@ -212,123 +273,194 @@ Available Collection operations include `create`, `find`, `findByID`, `update`,
 import type { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterOperationHook: CollectionAfterOperationHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the operation
-  operation, // name of the operation
-  req, // full Request object
-  result, // the result of the operation, before modifications
+  result,
 }) => {
-  return result // return modified result as necessary
+  return result
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterOperation` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`result`**          |  The result of the operation, before modifications. |
+
 ### beforeLogin
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionBeforeLoginHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeLoginHook: CollectionBeforeLoginHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  user, // user being logged in
+  user,
 }) => {
   return user
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeLogin` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ### afterLogin
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionAfterLoginHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterLoginHook: CollectionAfterLoginHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  user, // user that was logged in
-  token, // user token
+  user,
+  token,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogin` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`token`**              | The token generated for the user. |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ### afterLogout
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `logout` operations.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `logout` operations.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionAfterLogoutHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterLogoutHook: CollectionAfterLogoutHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
+  req,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-### afterRefresh
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogout` hook:
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload';
-
-const afterRefreshHook: CollectionAfterRefreshHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  res, // full Response object
-  token, // newly refreshed user token
-}) => {...}
-```
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 ### afterMe
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `me` operations.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `me` operations.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionAfterMeHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterMeHook: CollectionAfterMeHook = async ({
-  req, // full Request object
-  response, // response to return
+  req,
+  response,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterMe` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`response`**           | The response to return. |
+
+### afterRefresh
+
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload';
+
+const afterRefreshHook: CollectionAfterRefreshHook = async ({
+  token,
+}) => {...}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`exp`**                | The expiration time of the token. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`token`**              | The newly refreshed user token. |
+
 ### afterForgotPassword
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterForgotPasswordHook: CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the operation
+  args,
   context,
-  collection, // The collection which this hook is being run on
+  collection,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterForgotPassword` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+
 ### refresh
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `refresh` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `refresh` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionRefreshHook } from 'payload'
 
 const myRefreshHook: CollectionRefreshHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the `refresh` operation
-  user, // the user as queried from the database 
+  args,
+  user,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ### me
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `me` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `me` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionMeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const meHook: CollectionMeHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the `me` operation
-  user, // the user as queried from the database 
+  args,
+  user,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `me` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for each Collection hook which can be accessed as follows:

docs/hooks/context.mdx

@@ -6,22 +6,22 @@ desc: Context allows you to pass in extra data that can be shared between hooks
 keywords: hooks, context, payload context, payloadcontext, data, extra data, shared data, shared, extra
 ---
 
-The `context` object in hooks is used to share data across different hooks. The persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every hook. This allows you to add logic to your hooks based on the request state by setting properties to `req.context` and using them elsewhere.
+The `context` object is used to share data across different Hooks. This persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every Hook. By setting properties to `req.context`, you can effectively logic across multiple Hooks.
 
-## When to use Context
+## When To Use Context
 
 Context gives you a way forward on otherwise difficult problems such as:
 
-1. **Passing data between hooks**: Needing data in multiple hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
+1. **Passing data between Hooks**: Needing data in multiple Hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
 2. **Preventing infinite loops**: Calling `payload.update()` on the same document that triggered an `afterChange` hook will create an infinite loop, control the flow by assigning a no-op condition to context
 3. **Passing data to local API**: Setting values on the `req.context` and pass it to `payload.create()` you can provide additional data to hooks without adding extraneous fields.
 4. **Passing data between hooks and middleware or custom endpoints**: Hooks could set context across multiple collections and then be used in a final `postMiddleware`.
 
-## How to Use Context
+## How To Use Context
 
 Let's see examples on how context can be used in the first two scenarios mentioned above:
 
-### Passing data between hooks
+### Passing Data Between Hooks
 
 To pass data between hooks, you can assign values to context in an earlier hook in the lifecycle of a request and expect it the context in a later hook.
 
@@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
       },
     ],
     afterChange: [
+
       async ({ context, doc, req }) => {
         // use context.customerData without needing to fetch it again
         if (context.customerData.contacted === false) {
@@ -57,7 +58,7 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Preventing infinite loops
+### Preventing Infinite Loops
 
 Let's say you have an `afterChange` hook, and you want to do a calculation inside the hook (as the document ID needed for the calculation is available in the `afterChange` hook, but not in the `beforeChange` hook). Once that's done, you want to update the document with the result of the calculation.
 
@@ -120,11 +121,11 @@ const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-## Typing context
+## TypeScript
 
-The default typescript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
+The default TypeScript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
 
-This is known as "type augmentation" - a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any .ts or .d.ts file:
+This is known as "type augmentation", a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any `.ts` or `.d.ts` file:
 
 ```ts
 import { RequestContext as OriginalRequestContext } from 'payload'

docs/hooks/fields.mdx

@@ -1,38 +1,41 @@
 ---
 title: Field Hooks
 label: Fields
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Hooks can be added to any fields, and optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues.
 keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They help to isolate concerns and package up
-functionalities to be easily reusable across your projects.
+Field Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents on a per-field basis. They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle. Field Hooks offer incredible potential for isolating your logic from the rest of your [Collection Hooks](./collections) and [Global Hooks](./globals).
 
-**Example use cases include:**
-
-- Automatically add an `owner` relationship to a Document based on the `req.user.id`
-- Encrypt / decrypt a sensitive field using `beforeValidate` and `afterRead` hooks
-- Auto-generate field data using a `beforeValidate` hook
-- Format incoming data such as kebab-casing a document `slug` with `beforeValidate`
-- Restrict updating a document to only once every X hours using the `beforeChange` hook
-
-**All field types provide the following hooks:**
-
-- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
-- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
-- beforeDuplicate(#beforeduplicate)
-- [afterChange](#afterchange)
-- [afterRead](#afterread)
-
-## Config
-
-Example field configuration:
+To add Hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload';
 
-const ExampleField: Field = {
+export const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
+  // ...
+  hooks: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+All Field Hooks accept an array of synchronous or asynchronous functions. These functions can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. All Field Hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based the specific hook type.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, changing the type of data that you return from a field will produce errors in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). If you need to change the shape or type of data, consider [Collection Hooks](./collections) or [Global Hooks](./hooks) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+To add hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
+
+const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
   name: 'name',
   type: 'text',
   // highlight-start
@@ -47,64 +50,37 @@ const ExampleField: Field = {
 }
 ```
 
-## Arguments and return values
-
-All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based on
-which field hook you are utilizing.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For
-  example, if you are writing a <strong>beforeChange</strong> hook, you may want to perform
-  different logic based on if the current <strong>operation</strong> is <strong>create</strong> or{' '}
-  <strong>update</strong>.
-</Banner>
-
-#### Arguments
-
-Field Hooks receive one `args` argument that contains the following properties:
+The following arguments are provided to all Field Hooks:
 
 | Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
 | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`data`**               | The data passed to update the document within `create` and `update` operations, and the full document itself in the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                 |
-| **`siblingData`**        | The sibling data passed to a field that the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Global, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | In the `afterRead` hook this is the full Document. In the `create` and `update` operations, this is the incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`field`**              | The [Field](../fields/overview) which the Hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`findMany`**           | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many within the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                                           |
-| **`operation`**          | A string relating to which operation the field type is currently executing within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The full original document in `update` operations. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting document of the operation.                                                                                        |
-| **`previousDoc`**        | The document before changes were applied, only in `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
-| **`req`**                | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. It is mocked for Local API operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`value`**              | The value of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`global`**             | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Collection, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | In the `update` operation, this is the Document before changes were applied. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting Document.                                                                                        |
+| **`overrideAccess`**        | A boolean to denote if the current operation is overriding [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`path`**             | The path to the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | In the `afterChange` Hook, this is the Document before changes were applied.                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the Document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
 | **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                      |
-| **`context`**            | Context passed to this hook. More info can be found under [Context](/docs/hooks/context)                                                                                                                              |
-| **`field`**              | The field which the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`collection`**         | The collection which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a global, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`global`**             | The global which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a collection, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`schemaPath`**         | The path of the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`siblingData`**        | The data of sibling fields adjacent to the field that the Hook is running against.        |
+| **`siblingDocWithLocales`**      | The sibling data of the Document with all [Locales](../configuration/localization).        |
+| **`value`**              | The value of the [Field](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                                                               |
 
-#### Return value
-
-All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. Field Hooks may
-optionally return the value that should be used within the field.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important</strong>
-  <br />
-  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, you should never change the type of data that you return from a
-  field, otherwise GraphQL will produce errors. If you need to change the shape or type of data,
-  reconsider Field Hooks and instead evaluate if Collection / Global hooks might suit you better.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For example, if you are writing a `beforeChange` hook, you may want to perform different logic based on if the current `operation` is `create` or `update`.
 </Banner>
 
-## Examples of Field Hooks
-
-To better illustrate how field-level hooks can be applied, here are some specific examples. These demonstrate the
-flexibility and potential of field hooks in different contexts. Remember, these examples are just a starting point - the
-true potential of field-level hooks lies in their adaptability to a wide array of use cases.
-
 ### beforeValidate
 
-Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes
-validation.
+Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes validation.
 
 ```ts
 import type { Field } from 'payload'

docs/hooks/globals.mdx

@@ -1,33 +1,41 @@
 ---
 title: Global Hooks
 label: Globals
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Hooks can be added to any Global and allow you to validate data, flatten locales, hide protected fields, remove fields and more.
 keywords: hooks, globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Globals feature the ability to define the following hooks:
+Global Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on [Global](../configuration/globals) Documents. They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle.
 
-- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
-- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
-- [afterChange](#afterchange)
-- [beforeRead](#beforeread)
-- [afterRead](#afterread)
-
-## Config
-
-All Global Hook properties accept arrays of synchronous or asynchronous functions. Each Hook type receives specific arguments and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
-
-`globals/example-hooks.js`
+To add Hooks to a Global, use the `hooks` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
 
 ```ts
 import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
 
-const ExampleHooks: GlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'header',
-  fields: [
-    { name: 'title', type: 'text'},
-  ]
+export const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  hooks: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can also set hooks on the field-level to isolate hook logic to specific fields. [More details](./fields).
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+All Global Hooks accept an array of [synchronous or asynchronous functions](./overview#async-vs-synchronous). Each Global Hook receives specific arguments based on its own type, and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
+
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
+
+const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
   hooks: {
     beforeValidate: [(args) => {...}],
     beforeChange: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -35,6 +43,7 @@ const ExampleHooks: GlobalConfig = {
     afterChange: [(args) => {...}],
     afterRead: [(args) => {...}],
   }
+  // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
@@ -46,14 +55,24 @@ Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to add or format data b
 import type { GlobalBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: GlobalBeforeValidateHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
+  req,
+  originalDoc,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to update the document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeValidate` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeChange
 
 Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within the `update` operation. At this stage, you can be confident that the data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field validations. You can optionally modify the shape of data to be saved.
@@ -62,14 +81,24 @@ Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within the `upda
 import type { GlobalBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeChangeHook: GlobalBeforeChangeHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
+  req,
+  originalDoc,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to update the document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterChange
 
 After a global is updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. Use this hook to purge caches of your applications, sync site data to CRMs, and more.
@@ -78,14 +107,24 @@ After a global is updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. Use this hook to purge c
 import type { GlobalAfterChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterChangeHook: GlobalAfterChangeHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
-  req, // full Request object
+  doc,
+  previousDoc,
+  req,
 }) => {
   return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | The Document before changes were applied. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeRead
 
 Runs before `findOne` global operation is transformed for output by `afterRead`. This hook fires before hidden fields are removed and before localized fields are flattened into the requested locale. Using this Hook will provide you with all locales and all hidden fields via the `doc` argument.
@@ -94,11 +133,20 @@ Runs before `findOne` global operation is transformed for output by `afterRead`.
 import type { GlobalBeforeReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeReadHook: GlobalBeforeReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
+  doc,
+  req,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterRead
 
 Runs as the last step before a global is returned. Flattens locales, hides protected fields, and removes fields that users do not have access to.
@@ -107,12 +155,23 @@ Runs as the last step before a global is returned. Flattens locales, hides prote
 import type { GlobalAfterReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterReadHook: GlobalAfterReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
-  findMany, // boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions)
+  doc,
+  req,
+  findMany,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`findMany`**            | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for each Global hook which can be accessed as follows:

docs/hooks/overview.mdx

@@ -2,46 +2,95 @@
 title: Hooks Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Hooks allow you to add your own logic to Payload, including integrating with third-party APIs, adding auto-generated data, or modifing Payload's base functionality.
+desc: Hooks allow you to add your own logic to Payload, including integrating with third-party APIs, adding auto-generated data, or modifying Payload's base functionality.
 keywords: hooks, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Hooks are powerful ways to tie into existing Payload actions in order to add your own logic like
-  integrating with third-party APIs, adding auto-generated data, or modifing Payload's base
-  functionality.
+Hooks allow you to execute your own side effects during specific events of the Document lifecycle. They allow you to do things like mutate data, perform business logic, integrate with third-parties, or anything else, all during precise moments within your application.
+
+With Hooks, you can transform Payload from a traditional CMS into a fully-fledged application framework. There are many use cases for Hooks, including:
+
+- Modify data before it is read or updated
+- Encrypt and decrypt sensitive data
+- Integrate with a third-party CRM like HubSpot or Salesforce
+- Send a copy of uploaded files to Amazon S3 or similar
+- Process orders through a payment provider like Stripe
+- Send emails when contact forms are submitted
+- Track data ownership or changes over time
+
+There are four main types of Hooks in Payload:
+
+- [Root Hooks](#root-hooks)
+- [Collection Hooks](/docs/hooks/collections)
+- [Global Hooks](/docs/hooks/globals)
+- [Field Hooks](/docs/hooks/fields)
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  Payload also ships a set of _React_ hooks that you can use in your frontend application. Although they share a common name, these are very different things and should not be confused. [More details](../admin/hooks).
 </Banner>
 
-**With Hooks, you can transform Payload from a traditional CMS into a fully-fledged application framework.**
+## Root Hooks
 
-Example uses:
+Root Hooks are not associated with any specific Collection, Global, or Field. They are useful for globally-oriented side effects, such as when an error occurs at the application level.
 
-- Integrate user profiles with a third-party CRM such as Salesforce or Hubspot
-- Send a copy of uploaded files to Amazon S3 or similar
-- Automatically add `lastModifiedBy` data to a document to track who changed what over time
-- Encrypt a field's data when it's saved and decrypt it when it's read
-- Send emails when `ContactSubmission`s are created from a public website
-- Integrate with a payment provider like Stripe to automatically process payments when an `Order` is created
-- Securely recalculate order prices on the backend to ensure that the total price for `Order`s that users submit is accurate and valid
-- Generate and store a `lastLoggedIn` date on a user by adding an `afterLogin` hook
-- Add extra data to documents before they are read such as "average scores" or similar data that needs to be calculated on the fly
+To add Root Hooks, use the `hooks` property in your [Payload Config](/docs/configuration/config):
 
-There are many more use cases for Hooks and the sky is the limit.
+```ts
+import {  buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-## Async vs. synchronous
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  hooks: {
+    afterError: () => {...}
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
 
-All hooks can be written as either synchronous or asynchronous functions. If the Hook should modify data before a document is updated or created, and it relies on asynchronous actions such as fetching data from a third party, it might make sense to define your Hook as an asynchronous function, so you can be sure that your Hook completes before the operation's lifecycle continues. Async hooks are run in series - so if you have two async hooks defined, the second hook will wait for the first to complete before it starts.
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option       | Description                                                                                   |
+|--------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`afterError`** | Runs after an error occurs in the Payload application.                                         |
+
+### afterError
+
+The `afterError` Hook is triggered when an error occurs in the Payload application. This can be useful for logging errors to a third-party service, sending an email to the development team, logging the error to Sentry or DataDog, etc.
+
+```ts
+import {  buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  hooks: {
+    afterError: async ({ error }) => {
+      // Do something
+    }
+  },
+})
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterError` Hook:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`error`**  | The error that occurred.                                                                      |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+
+## Async vs. Synchronous
+
+All Hooks can be written as either synchronous or asynchronous functions. Choosing the right type depends on your use case, but switching between the two is as simple as adding or removing the `async` keyword.
+
+#### Asynchronous
+
+If the Hook should modify data before a Document is updated or created, and it relies on asynchronous actions such as fetching data from a third party, it might make sense to define your Hook as an asynchronous function. This way you can be sure that your Hook completes before the operation's lifecycle continues. Async hooks are run in series - so if you have two async hooks defined, the second hook will wait for the first to complete before it starts.
+
+#### Synchronous
 
 If your Hook simply performs a side-effect, such as updating a CRM, it might be okay to define it synchronously, so the Payload operation does not have to wait for your hook to complete.
 
-## Server-only execution
+## Server-only Execution
 
-Payload Hooks are only triggered on the server and are automatically excluded from the Payload Admin bundle.
-
-## Hook Types
-
-You can specify hooks in the following contexts:
-
-- [Collection Hooks](/docs/hooks/collections)
-- [Field Hooks](/docs/hooks/fields)
-- [Global Hooks](/docs/hooks/globals)
+Hooks are only triggered on the server and are automatically excluded from the client-side bundle. This means that you can safely use sensitive business logic in your Hooks without worrying about exposing it to the client.

docs/integrations/vercel-content-link.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Payload + Vercel Content Link allows yours editors to navigate directly fr
 keywords: vercel, vercel content link, content link, visual editing, content source maps, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-[Vercel Content Link](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/edit-mode#content-link) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload config.
+[Vercel Content Link](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/edit-mode#content-link) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload Config.
 
 ![Versions](/images/docs/vercel-visual-editing.jpg)
 
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Setting up Payload with Vercel Content Link is easy. First, install the `@payloa
 npm i @payloadcms/plugin-csm
 ```
 
-Then in the `plugins` array of your Payload config, call the plugin and enable any collections that require Content Source Maps.
+Then in the `plugins` array of your Payload Config, call the plugin and enable any collections that require Content Source Maps.
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from "payload/config"

docs/lexical/building-custom-features.mdx

@@ -165,17 +165,17 @@ While nodes in the client feature are added by themselves to the nodes array, no
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`getSubFields`**              | If a node includes sub-fields (e.g. block and link nodes), passing the subFields schema here will make payload automatically populate & run hooks for them.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`getSubFields`**              | If a node includes sub-fields (e.g. block and link nodes), passing the subFields schema here will make Payload automatically populate & run hooks for them.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`getSubFieldsData`**          | If a node includes sub-fields, the sub-fields data needs to be returned here, alongside `getSubFields` which returns their schema.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
 | **`graphQLPopulationPromises`** | Allows you to run population logic when a node's data was requested from GraphQL. While `getSubFields` and `getSubFieldsData` automatically handle populating sub-fields (since they run hooks on them), those are only populated in the Rest API. This is because the Rest API hooks do not have access to the 'depth' property provided by GraphQL. In order for them to be populated correctly in GraphQL, the population logic needs to be provided here. |
 | **`node`**                      | The actual lexical node needs to be provided here. This also supports [lexical node replacements](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/node-replacement).                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`validations`**               | This allows you to provide node validations, which are run when your document is being validated, alongside other payload fields. You can use it to throw a validation error for a specific node in case its data is incorrect.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`validations`**               | This allows you to provide node validations, which are run when your document is being validated, alongside other Payload fields. You can use it to throw a validation error for a specific node in case its data is incorrect.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
 | **`converters`**                | Allows you to define how a node can be serialized into different formats. Currently, only supports HTML. Markdown converters are defined in `markdownTransformers` and not here.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
-| **`hooks`**                     | Just like payload fields, you can provide hooks which are run for this specific node. These are called Node Hooks.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`hooks`**                     | Just like Payload fields, you can provide hooks which are run for this specific node. These are called Node Hooks.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
 
 ### Feature load order
 
-Server features can also accept a function as the `feature` property (useful for sanitizing props, as mentioned below). This function will be called when the feature is loaded during the payload sanitization process:
+Server features can also accept a function as the `feature` property (useful for sanitizing props, as mentioned below). This function will be called when the feature is loaded during the Payload sanitization process:
 
 ```ts
 import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
@@ -836,4 +836,4 @@ The reason the client feature does not have the same props available as the serv
 
 ## More information
 
-Have a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/richtext-lexical/src/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of payload or not!
+Have a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/richtext-lexical/src/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of Payload or not!

docs/lexical/converters.mdx

@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ import { consolidateHTMLConverters, convertLexicalToHTML } from '@payloadcms/ric
 await convertLexicalToHTML({
   converters: consolidateHTMLConverters({ editorConfig }),
   data: editorData,
-  payload, // if you have payload but no req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes)
-  req, // if you have req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes). No need to pass in payload if req is passed in.
+  payload, // if you have Payload but no req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes)
+  req, // if you have req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes). No need to pass in Payload if req is passed in.
 })
 ```
 This method employs `convertLexicalToHTML` from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, which converts the serialized editor state into HTML.
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ import { createHeadlessEditor } from '@lexical/headless' // <= make sure this pa
 import { getEnabledNodes, sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
 const yourEditorConfig // <= your editor config here
-const payloadConfig // <= your payload config here
+const payloadConfig // <= your Payload Config here
 
 const headlessEditor = createHeadlessEditor({
   nodes: getEnabledNodes({
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Convert markdown content to the Lexical editor format with the following:
 import { $convertFromMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import { sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
-const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & payload config here
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & Payload Config here
 const markdown = `# Hello World`
 
 headlessEditor.update(
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ import { $convertToMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import { sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 import type { SerializedEditorState } from 'lexical'
 
-const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & payload config here
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & Payload Config here
 const yourEditorState: SerializedEditorState // <= your current editor state here
 
 // Import editor state into your headless editor

docs/lexical/migration.mdx

@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Just import the `migrateSlateToLexical` function we provide, pass it the `payloa
 IMPORTANT: This will overwrite all slate data. We recommend doing the following first:
 1. Take a backup of your entire database. If anything goes wrong and you do not have a backup, you are on your own and will not receive any support.
 2. Make every richText field a lexical editor. This script will only convert lexical richText fields with old Slate data
-3. Add the SlateToLexicalFeature (as seen below) first, and test it out by loading up the admin panel, to see if the migrator works as expected. You might have to build some custom converters for some fields first in order to convert custom Slate nodes. The SlateToLexicalFeature is where the converters are stored. Only fields with this feature added will be migrated.
+3. Add the SlateToLexicalFeature (as seen below) first, and test it out by loading up the Admin Panel, to see if the migrator works as expected. You might have to build some custom converters for some fields first in order to convert custom Slate nodes. The SlateToLexicalFeature is where the converters are stored. Only fields with this feature added will be migrated.
 
 ```ts
 import { migrateSlateToLexical } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ and done! Now, everytime this lexical editor is initialized, it converts the sla
 This is by far the easiest way to migrate from Slate to Lexical, although it does come with a few caveats:
 
 - There is a performance hit when initializing the lexical editor
-- The editor will still output the Slate data in the output JSON, as the on-the-fly converter only runs for the admin panel
+- The editor will still output the Slate data in the output JSON, as the on-the-fly converter only runs for the Admin Panel
 
 The easy way to solve this: Edit the richText field and save the document! This overrides the slate data with the lexical data, and the next time the document is loaded, the lexical data will be used. This solves both the performance and the output issue for that specific document. This, however, is a slow and gradual migration process, thus you will have to support both API formats. Especially for a large number of documents, we recommend running the migration script, as explained above.
 
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Each lexical node has a `version` property which is saved in the database. Every
 
 The problem is, this migration only happens when you open the editor, modify the richText field (so that the field's `setValue` function is called) and save the document. Until you do that for all documents, some documents will still have the old data.
 
-To solve this, we export an `upgradeLexicalData` function which goes through every single document in your payload app and re-saves it, if it has a lexical editor. This way, the data is automatically converted to the new format, and that automatic conversion gets applied to every single document in your app.
+To solve this, we export an `upgradeLexicalData` function which goes through every single document in your Payload app and re-saves it, if it has a lexical editor. This way, the data is automatically converted to the new format, and that automatic conversion gets applied to every single document in your app.
 
 IMPORTANT: Take a backup of your entire database. If anything goes wrong and you do not have a backup, you are on your own and will not receive any support.
 

docs/lexical/overview.mdx

@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ To use the Lexical editor, first you need to install it:
 npm install @payloadcms/richtext-lexical
 ```
 
-Once you have it installed, you can pass it to your top-level Payload config as follows:
+Once you have it installed, you can pass it to your top-level Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'

docs/live-preview/client.mdx

@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ And return the following values:
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  It is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../getting-started/concepts#depth) for more information.
+  It is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../queries/depth) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
 ## Frameworks
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ For a working demonstration of this, check out the official [Live Preview Exampl
 
 ## Troubleshooting
 
-### Relationships and/or uploads are not populating
+#### Relationships and/or uploads are not populating
 
 If you are using relationships or uploads in your front-end application, and your front-end application runs on a different domain than your Payload server, you may need to configure [CORS](../configuration/overview) to allow requests to be made between the two domains. This includes sites that are running on a different port or subdomain. Similarly, if you are protecting resources behind user authentication, you may also need to configure [CSRF](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection) to allow cookies to be sent between the two domains. For example:
 
@@ -271,9 +271,9 @@ If you are using relationships or uploads in your front-end application, and you
 }
 ```
 
-### Relationships and/or uploads disappear after editing a document
+#### Relationships and/or uploads disappear after editing a document
 
-It is possible that either you are setting an improper [`depth`](../getting-started/concepts#depth) in your initial request and/or your `useLivePreview` hook, or they're mismatched. Ensure that the `depth` parameter is set to the correct value, and that it matches exactly in both places. For example:
+It is possible that either you are setting an improper [`depth`](../queries/depth) in your initial request and/or your `useLivePreview` hook, or they're mismatched. Ensure that the `depth` parameter is set to the correct value, and that it matches exactly in both places. For example:
 
 ```tsx
 // Your initial request
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ const { data } = useLivePreview<PageType>({
 })
 ```
 
-### Iframe refuses to connect
+#### Iframe refuses to connect
 
 If your front-end application has set a [Content Security Policy](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CSP) (CSP) that blocks the Admin Panel from loading your front-end application, the iframe will not be able to load your site. To resolve this, you can whitelist the Admin Panel's domain in your CSP by setting the `frame-ancestors` directive:
 

docs/live-preview/overview.mdx

@@ -8,13 +8,7 @@ keywords: live preview, preview, live, iframe, iframe preview, visual editing, d
 
 With Live Preview you can render your front-end application directly within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). As you type, your changes take effect in real-time. No need to save a draft or publish your changes. This works in both [Server-side](./server) as well as [Client-side](./client) environments.
 
-Live Preview works by rendering an iframe on the page that loads your front-end application. The Admin Panel communicates with your app through [`window.postMessage`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Window/postMessage) events. These events are emitted every time a change is made to the document. Your app then listens for these events and re-renders itself with the data it receives.
-
-{/* IMAGE OF LIVE PREVIEW HERE */}
-
-## Setup
-
-Setting up Live Preview is easy. This can be done either globally through the [Root Config](../configuration/overview), or on individual [Collection](../configuration/collections) and [Global](../configuration/globals) configs. Once configured, a new "Live Preview" tab will appear at the top of enabled documents. Navigating to this tab opens the preview window and loads your front-end application.
+Live Preview works by rendering an iframe on the page that loads your front-end application. The Admin Panel communicates with your app through [`window.postMessage`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Window/postMessage) events. These events are emitted every time a change is made to the Document. Your app then listens for these events and re-renders itself with the data it receives.
 
 To add Live Preview, use the `admin.livePreview` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
 
@@ -27,13 +21,23 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     // ...
     // highlight-start
     livePreview: {
-      url: 'http://localhost:3000', // The URL to your front-end, this can also be a function (see below)
-      collections: ['pages'], // The Collection(s) to enable Live Preview on (Globals are also possible)
+      url: 'http://localhost:3000',
+      collections: ['pages']
     },
     // highlight-end
   }
 })
 ```
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  Alternatively, you can define the <code>admin.livePreview</code> property on individual [Collection Admin Configs](../admin/collections) and [Global Admin Configs](../admin/globals). Settings defined here will be merged into the top-level as overrides.
+</Banner>
+
+{/* IMAGE OF LIVE PREVIEW HERE */}
+
+## Options
+
+Setting up Live Preview is easy. This can be done either globally through the [Root Admin Config](../admin/overview), or on individual [Collection Admin Configs](../admin/collections) and [Global Admin Configs](../admin/globals). Once configured, a new "Live Preview" tab will appear at the top of enabled Documents. Navigating to this tab opens the preview window and loads your front-end application.
 
 The following options are available:
 
@@ -46,11 +50,6 @@ The following options are available:
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  Alternatively, you can define the <code>admin.livePreview</code> property on individual [Collection](../configuration/collections) and [Global](../configuration/globals) configs. Settings defined here will be merged into the top-level as overrides.
-</Banner>
-
 ### URL
 
 The `url` property is a string that points to your front-end application. This value is used as the `src` attribute of the iframe rendering your front-end. Once loaded, the Admin Panel will communicate directly with your app through `window.postMessage` events.
@@ -74,7 +73,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 #### Dynamic URLs
 
-You can also pass a function in order to dynamically format URLs. This is useful for multi-tenant applications, localization, or any other scenario where the URL needs to be generated based on the document being edited.
+You can also pass a function in order to dynamically format URLs. This is useful for multi-tenant applications, localization, or any other scenario where the URL needs to be generated based on the Document being edited.
 
 To set dynamic URLs, set the `admin.livePreview.url` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) to a function:
 
@@ -105,8 +104,8 @@ The following arguments are provided to the `url` function:
 
 | Path               | Description                                                                                                       |
 | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`data`**         | The data of the document being edited. This includes changes that have not yet been saved.                        |
-| **`documentInfo`** | Information about the document being edited like collection slug. [More details](../admin/hooks#usedocumentinfo). |
+| **`data`**         | The data of the Document being edited. This includes changes that have not yet been saved.                        |
+| **`documentInfo`** | Information about the Document being edited like collection slug. [More details](../admin/hooks#usedocumentinfo). |
 | **`locale`**       | The locale currently being edited (if applicable). [More details](../configuration/localization).                 |
 
 ### Breakpoints

docs/live-preview/server.mdx

@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ For a working demonstration of this, check out the official [Live Preview Exampl
 
 ## Troubleshooting
 
-### Updates do not appear as fast as client-side Live Preview
+#### Updates do not appear as fast as client-side Live Preview
 
 If you are noticing that updates feel less snappy than client-side Live Preview (i.e. the `useLivePreview` hook), this is because of how the two differ in how they work—instead of emitting events against _form state_, server-side Live Preview refreshes the route after a new document is _saved_.
 
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Use [Autosave](../versions/autosave) to mimic this effect server-side. Try decre
 }
 ```
 
-### Iframe refuses to connect
+#### Iframe refuses to connect
 
 If your front-end application has set a [Content Security Policy](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CSP) (CSP) that blocks the Admin Panel from loading your front-end application, the iframe will not be able to load your site. To resolve this, you can whitelist the Admin Panel's domain in your CSP by setting the `frame-ancestors` directive:
 

docs/local-api/outside-nextjs.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Using Payload outside Next.js
 label: Outside Next.js
 order: 20
-desc: Payload can be used outside of Next.js within standalone scripts or in other frameworks like Remix, Sveltekit, Nuxt, and similar. 
+desc: Payload can be used outside of Next.js within standalone scripts or in other frameworks like Remix, Sveltekit, Nuxt, and similar.
 keywords: local api, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
@@ -11,16 +11,16 @@ Payload can be used completely outside of Next.js which is helpful in cases like
 <Banner>
   <strong>Note:</strong>
   <br/>
-  Payload and all of its official packages are fully ESM. If you want to use Payload within your own projects, make sure you are writing your scripts in ESM format or dynamically importing the Payload config.
+  Payload and all of its official packages are fully ESM. If you want to use Payload within your own projects, make sure you are writing your scripts in ESM format or dynamically importing the Payload Config.
 </Banner>
 
-## Importing the Payload config outside of Next.js
+## Importing the Payload Config outside of Next.js
 
-Your Payload config likely has imports which need to be handled properly, such as CSS imports and similar. If you were to try and import your config without any Node support for SCSS / CSS files, you'll see errors that arise accordingly. 
+Your Payload Config likely has imports which need to be handled properly, such as CSS imports and similar. If you were to try and import your config without any Node support for SCSS / CSS files, you'll see errors that arise accordingly.
 
-This is especially relevant if you are importing your Payload config outside of a bundler context, such as in standalone Node scripts.
+This is especially relevant if you are importing your Payload Config outside of a bundler context, such as in standalone Node scripts.
 
-For these cases, you can use Payload's `importConfig` function to handle importing your config safely. It will handle everything you need to be able to load and use your Payload config, without any client-side files present.
+For these cases, you can use Payload's `importConfig` function to handle importing your config safely. It will handle everything you need to be able to load and use your Payload Config, without any client-side files present.
 
 Here's an example of a seed script that creates a few documents for local development / testing purposes, using Payload's `importConfig` function to safely import Payload, and the `getPayload` function to retrieve an initialized copy of Payload.
 
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Here's an example of a seed script that creates a few documents for local develo
 // you should always use `import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'` instead.
 import { getPayload } from 'payload'
 
-// This is a helper function that will make sure we can safely load the Payload config
+// This is a helper function that will make sure we can safely load the Payload Config
 // and all of its client-side files, such as CSS, SCSS, etc.
 import { importConfig } from 'payload/node'
 
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ import dotenv from 'dotenv'
 const filename = fileURLToPath(import.meta.url)
 const dirname = path.dirname(filename)
 
-// If you don't need to load your .env file, 
+// If you don't need to load your .env file,
 // then you can skip this part!
 dotenv.config({
   path: path.resolve(dirname, '../.env'),

docs/local-api/overview.mdx

@@ -19,8 +19,7 @@ Here are some common examples of how you can use the Local API:
 - Fetching Payload data within React Server Components
 - Seeding data via Node seed scripts that you write and maintain
 - Opening custom Next.js route handlers which feature additional functionality but still rely on Payload
-- Within Payload access control and hook functions
-- Within access control and hook functions
+- Within [Access Control](../access-control) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview)
 
 ## Accessing Payload
 
@@ -28,7 +27,7 @@ You can gain access to the currently running `payload` object via two ways:
 
 #### Accessing from args or `req`
 
-In most places within Payload itself, you can access `payload` directly from the arguments of hooks, access control, validation functions, and similar. This is the simplest way to access Payload in most cases. Most config functions take the `req` (Request) object, which has Payload bound to it (`req.payload`).
+In most places within Payload itself, you can access `payload` directly from the arguments of [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Validation](../fields/overview#validations) functions, and similar. This is the simplest way to access Payload in most cases. Most config functions take the `req` (Request) object, which has Payload bound to it (`req.payload`).
 
 Example:
 
@@ -55,9 +54,9 @@ import config from '@payload-config'
 const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
 ```
 
-You should import Payload using the first option (`getPayloadHMR`) if you are using Payload inside of Next.js (like route handlers, server components, and similar.) 
+You should import Payload using the first option (`getPayloadHMR`) if you are using Payload inside of Next.js (like route handlers, server components, and similar.)
 
-This way, in Next.js development mode, Payload will work with Hot Module Replacement (HMR), and as you make changes to your Payload config, your usage of Payload will always be in sync with your changes. In production, `getPayloadHMR` simply disables all HMR functionality so you don't need to write your code any differently. We handle optimization for you in production mode.
+This way, in Next.js development mode, Payload will work with Hot Module Replacement (HMR), and as you make changes to your Payload Config, your usage of Payload will always be in sync with your changes. In production, `getPayloadHMR` simply disables all HMR functionality so you don't need to write your code any differently. We handle optimization for you in production mode.
 
 If you are accessing Payload via function arguments or `req.payload`, HMR is automatically supported if you are using it within Next.js.
 
@@ -73,7 +72,7 @@ const config = await importConfig('./payload.config.ts')
 const payload = await getPayload({ config })
 ```
 
-Both options function in exactly the same way outside of one having HMR support and the other not. However, when you import your Payload config, you need to make sure that you can import it safely. 
+Both options function in exactly the same way outside of one having HMR support and the other not. However, when you import your Payload Config, you need to make sure that you can import it safely.
 
 For more information about using Payload outside of Next.js, [click here](/docs/beta/local-api/outside-nextjs).
 
@@ -85,7 +84,7 @@ You can specify more options within the Local API vs. REST or GraphQL due to the
 | ------------------ | ------------ |
 | `collection`       | Required for Collection operations. Specifies the Collection slug to operate against. |
 | `data`             | The data to use within the operation. Required for `create`, `update`. |
-| `depth`            | [Control auto-population](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) of nested relationship and upload fields. |
+| `depth`            | [Control auto-population](../queries/depth) of nested relationship and upload fields. |
 | `locale`           | Specify [locale](/docs/configuration/localization) for any returned documents. |
 | `fallbackLocale`   | Specify a [fallback locale](/docs/configuration/localization) to use for any returned documents. |
 | `overrideAccess`   | Skip access control. By default, this property is set to true within all Local API operations. |

docs/migration-guide/overview.mdx

@@ -9,11 +9,11 @@ The core logic and principles of Payload remain the same for 3.0. The brunt of t
 
 ## To migrate from Payload 2.0 to 3.0:
 
-1. Delete the `admin.bundler` property from your Payload config:
+1. Delete the `admin.bundler` property from your Payload Config:
 
-Payload no longer bundles the admin panel. Instead, we rely directly on Next.js for bundling. This also means that the `@payloadcms/bundler-webpack` and `@payloadcms/bundler-vite` packages have been deprecated. You can completely uninstall those from your project by removing them from your `package.json` file and re-running your package manager’s installation process, i.e. `pnpm i`.
+Payload no longer bundles the Admin Panel. Instead, we rely directly on Next.js for bundling. This also means that the `@payloadcms/bundler-webpack` and `@payloadcms/bundler-vite` packages have been deprecated. You can completely uninstall those from your project by removing them from your `package.json` file and re-running your package manager’s installation process, i.e. `pnpm i`.
 
-2. Add the `secret` property to your Payload config. This used to be set in the `payload.init()` function of your `server.ts` file. Move it to `payload.config.ts` instead:
+2. Add the `secret` property to your Payload Config. This used to be set in the `payload.init()` function of your `server.ts` file. Move it to `payload.config.ts` instead:
 
 ```tsx
 // payload.config.ts
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-3. The `admin.css` and `admin.scss` properties in the Payload config have been removed:
+3. The `admin.css` and `admin.scss` properties in the Payload Config have been removed:
 
 Instead for any global styles you can:
 
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Instead, use the new `beforeDuplicate` field-level hook which take the usual fie
 ```tsx
 // ❌ Before
 // file: collections/Posts.ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const PostsCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'posts',
@@ -180,7 +180,6 @@ import {
   useFormInitializing,
   useFormModified,
   useFormProcessing,
-  useFormQueryParams,
   useFormSubmitted,
   useHotkey,
   useIntersect,
@@ -221,7 +220,6 @@ import {
   EntityVisibilityProvider,
   FieldComponentsProvider,
   FieldPropsProvider,
-  FormQueryParamsProvider,
   ListInfoProvider,
   ListQueryProvider,
   LocaleProvider,
@@ -414,7 +412,7 @@ export const MyClientComponent = {
 }
 ```
 
-8. The `custom` property in the Payload config, i.e. collections, globals, blocks, and fields are now ***server only***.
+8. The `custom` property in the Payload Config, i.e. collections, globals, blocks, and fields are now ***server only***.
 
 Use `admin.custom` properties will be available in both server and client bundles.
 
@@ -708,11 +706,11 @@ This was changed for improved semantics. If you were previously importing this t
 ```tsx
 // ❌ Before
 
-import type { Fields } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Fields } from 'payload'
 
 // ✅ After
 
-import type { FormState } from 'payload/types'
+import type { FormState } from 'payload'
 ```
 
 16. The `useDocumentInfo` hook no longer returns a `SanizitedCollectionConfig` or `SanitizedGlobalConfig`:
@@ -868,7 +866,7 @@ const { i18n, t } = useTranslation()
 return <p>{t('general:cancel')}</p>
 ```
 
-- `react-i18n` was removed, the `Trans` component from react-i18n has been replaced with a payload provided solution. You can instead `import { Translation } from "@payloadcms/ui"`
+- `react-i18n` was removed, the `Trans` component from react-i18n has been replaced with a Payload provided solution. You can instead `import { Translation } from "@payloadcms/ui"`
 
 ```tsx
 // Translation string example
@@ -1017,7 +1015,7 @@ import { addLocalesToRequest } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
 
 ## Uploads
 
-- `staticDir` must now be an absolute path. Before it would attempt to use the location of the payload config and merge the relative path set for staticDir.
+- `staticDir` must now be an absolute path. Before it would attempt to use the location of the Payload Config and merge the relative path set for staticDir.
 - `staticURL` has been removed. If you were using this format URLs when using an external provider, you can leverage the `generateFileURL` functions in order to do the same.
 
 ## Email Adapters

docs/plugins/build-your-own.mdx

@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Building your own [Payload Plugin](./overview) is easy, and if you're alrea
 
 Our plugin template includes everything you need to build a full life-cycle plugin:
 
-- Example files and functions for extending the payload config
+- Example files and functions for extending the Payload Config
 - A local dev environment to develop the plugin
 - Test suite with integrated GitHub workflow
 
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Here is a brief recap of how to integrate plugins with Payload, to learn more he
 
 ### How to install a plugin
 
-To install any plugin, simply add it to your Payload config in the plugins array.
+To install any plugin, simply add it to your Payload Config in the plugins array.
 
 ```
 import samplePlugin from 'sample-plugin';
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ export const samplePlugin =
  }
 ```
 
-1. First, you need to receive the existing Payload config along with any plugin options.
+1. First, you need to receive the existing Payload Config along with any plugin options.
 2. Then set the variable `config` to be equal to a copy of the existing config.
 3. From here, you can extend the config however you like!
 4. Finally, return the config and you're all set.
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ export const samplePlugin =
 
 [Spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) (or the spread operator) is a feature in JavaScript that uses the dot notation **(...)** to spread elements from arrays, strings, or objects into various contexts.
 
-We are going to use spread syntax to allow us to add data to existing arrays without losing the existing data. It is crucial to spread the existing data correctly, else this can cause adverse behavior and conflicts with Payload config and other plugins.
+We are going to use spread syntax to allow us to add data to existing arrays without losing the existing data. It is crucial to spread the existing data correctly, else this can cause adverse behavior and conflicts with Payload Config and other plugins.
 
 Let's say you want to build a plugin that adds a new collection:
 
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ config.collections = [
 ]
 ```
 
-First, you need to spread the `config.collections` to ensure that we don't lose the existing collections. Then you can add any additional collections, just as you would in a regular payload config.
+First, you need to spread the `config.collections` to ensure that we don't lose the existing collections. Then you can add any additional collections, just as you would in a regular Payload Config.
 
 This same logic is applied to other properties like admin, globals, hooks:
 
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ The best way to share and allow others to use your plugin once it is complete is
 
 ### Add payload-plugin topic tag
 
-Apply the tag **payload-plugin** to your GitHub repository. This will boost the visibility of your plugin and ensure it gets listed with [existing payload plugins](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
+Apply the tag **payload-plugin** to your GitHub repository. This will boost the visibility of your plugin and ensure it gets listed with [existing Payload plugins](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
 
 ### Use Semantic Versioning (SemVer)
 

docs/plugins/form-builder.mdx

@@ -2,15 +2,15 @@
 title: Form Builder Plugin
 label: Form Builder
 order: 20
-desc: Easily build and manage forms from the admin panel. Send dynamic, personalized emails and even accept and process payments.
+desc: Easily build and manage forms from the Admin Panel. Send dynamic, personalized emails and even accept and process payments.
 keywords: plugins, plugin, form, forms, form builder
 ---
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)
 
-This plugin allows you to build and manage custom forms directly within the admin panel. Instead of hard-coding a new form into your website or application every time you need one, admins can simply define the schema for each form they need on-the-fly, and your front-end can map over this schema, render its own UI components, and match your brand's design system.
+This plugin allows you to build and manage custom forms directly within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Instead of hard-coding a new form into your website or application every time you need one, admins can simply define the schema for each form they need on-the-fly, and your front-end can map over this schema, render its own UI components, and match your brand's design system.
 
-All form submissions are stored directly in your database and are managed directly from the admin panel. When forms are submitted, you can display a custom on-screen confirmation message to the user or redirect them to a dedicated confirmation page. You can even send dynamic, personalized emails derived from the form's data. For example, you may want to send a confirmation email to the user who submitted the form, and also send a notification email to your team.
+All form submissions are stored directly in your database and are managed directly from the Admin Panel. When forms are submitted, you can display a custom on-screen confirmation message to the user or redirect them to a dedicated confirmation page. You can even send dynamic, personalized emails derived from the form's data. For example, you may want to send a confirmation email to the user who submitted the form, and also send a notification email to your team.
 
 Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a multi-step lead generation engine, or even a donation form that processes payment. You may not need to reach for third-party services like HubSpot or Mailchimp for this, but instead use your own first-party tooling, built directly into your own application.
 
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a m
 
 ## Core Features
 
-- Build completely dynamic forms directly from the admin panel for a variety of use cases
+- Build completely dynamic forms directly from the Admin Panel for a variety of use cases
 - Render forms on your front-end using your own UI components and match your brand's design system
 - Send dynamic, personalized emails upon form submission to multiple recipients, derived from the form's data
 - Display a custom confirmation message or automatically redirect upon form submission
@@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ pnpm add @payloadcms/plugin-form-builder
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { formBuilderPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder'
 
 const config = buildConfig({

docs/plugins/nested-docs.mdx

@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin
 with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nestedDocsPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ You can also extend the built-in `parent` and `breadcrumbs` fields per collectio
 and `createBreadcrumbField` methods. They will merge your customizations overtop the plugin's base field configurations.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 import { createParentField } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields'
 import { createBreadcrumbsField } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields'
 
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ const examplePageConfig: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ## Localization
 
-This plugin supports localization by default. If the `localization` property is set in your Payload config,
+This plugin supports localization by default. If the `localization` property is set in your Payload Config,
 the `breadcrumbs` field is automatically localized. For more details on how localization works in Payload, see
 the [Localization](https://payloadcms.com/docs/localization/overview) docs.
 

docs/plugins/overview.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,26 @@ desc: Plugins provide a great way to modularize Payload functionalities into eas
 keywords: plugins, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Plugins take full advantage of the modularity of the [Payload Config](../configuration/overview), allowing developers to easily extend Payload's core functionality in a precise and granular way. This pattern allows developers to easily inject custom—sometimes complex—functionality into Payload apps from a very small touch-point.
+Payload Plugins take full advantage of the modularity of the [Payload Config](../configuration/overview), allowing developers developers to easily inject custom—sometimes complex—functionality into Payload apps from a very small touch-point. This is especially useful is sharing your work across multiple projects or with the greater Payload community.
 
 There are many [Official Plugins](#official-plugins) available that solve for some of the most common uses cases, such as the [Form Builder Plugin](./seo) or [SEO Plugin](./seo). There are also [Community Plugins](#community-plugins) available, maintained entirely by contributing members. To extend Payload's functionality in some other way, you can easily [build your own plugin](./build-your-own).
 
-Writing plugins is no more complex than writing regular JavaScript. If you know the basic concept of [callback functions](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Glossary/Callback_function) or how [spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) works, and are up to speed with Payload concepts, then writing a plugin will be a breeze.
+To configure Plugins, use the `plugins` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  plugins: [
+    // Add Plugins here
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+Writing Plugins is no more complex than writing regular JavaScript. If you know the basic concept of [callback functions](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Glossary/Callback_function) or how [spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) works, and are up to speed with Payload concepts, then writing a plugin will be a breeze.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   Because we rely on a simple config-based structure, Payload Plugins simply take in an
@@ -23,7 +38,7 @@ Writing plugins is no more complex than writing regular JavaScript. If you know
 - Automatically sync data from a specific collection to HubSpot or a similar CRM when data is added or changes
 - Add password-protection functionality to certain documents
 - Add a full e-commerce backend to any Payload app
-- Add custom reporting views to Payload's admin panel
+- Add custom reporting views to Payload's Admin Panel
 - Encrypt specific collections' data
 - Add a full form builder implementation
 - Integrate all `upload`-enabled collections with a third-party file host like S3 or Cloudinary
@@ -59,32 +74,19 @@ Some plugins have become so widely used that they are adopted as an [Official Pl
   For maintainers building plugins for others to use, please add the `payload-plugin` topic on [GitHub](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin) to help others find it.
 </Banner>
 
-## Installing Plugins
+## Example
 
 The base [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) allows for a `plugins` property which takes an `array` of [Plugin Configs](./build-your-own).
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-// note: these plugins are not real (yet?)
-import addLastModified from 'payload-add-last-modified'
-import passwordProtect from 'payload-password-protect'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { addLastModified } from './addLastModified.ts'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
   // ...
   // highlight-start
   plugins: [
-    // Many plugins require options to be passed.
-    // In the following example, we call the function
-    // and pass it options accordingly
-    passwordProtect(['pages']),
-
-    // This plugin takes no options and just
-    // needs to be passed directly
     addLastModified,
-
-    // ..
-    // To understand how to use the plugins you're interested in,
-    // consult their corresponding documentation
   ],
   // highlight-end
 })
@@ -97,9 +99,9 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 Here is an example what the `addLastModified` plugin from above might look like. It adds a `lastModifiedBy` field to all Payload collections. For full details, see [how to build your own plugin](./build-your-own).
 
 ```ts
-import { Config, Plugin } from 'payload/config'
+import { Config, Plugin } from 'payload'
 
-const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
+export const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
   // Find all incoming auth-enabled collections
   // so we can create a lastModifiedBy relationship field
   // to all auth collections
@@ -142,6 +144,9 @@ const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
 
   return config
 }
-
-export default addLastModified
 ```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  See [how to build your own plugin](./build-your-own) for a more in-depth explication on how create your own Payload Plugin.
+</Banner>

docs/plugins/redirects.mdx

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ keywords: plugins, redirects, redirect, plugin, payload, cms, seo, indexing, sea
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)
 
-This plugin allows you to easily manage redirects for your application from within your admin panel. It does so by adding a `redirects` collection to your config that allows you specify a redirect from one URL to another. Your front-end application can use this data to automatically redirect users to the correct page using proper HTTP status codes. This is useful for SEO, indexing, and search engine ranking when re-platforming or when changing your URL structure.
+This plugin allows you to easily manage redirects for your application from within your [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). It does so by adding a `redirects` collection to your config that allows you specify a redirect from one URL to another. Your front-end application can use this data to automatically redirect users to the correct page using proper HTTP status codes. This is useful for SEO, indexing, and search engine ranking when re-platforming or when changing your URL structure.
 
 For example, if you have a page at `/about` and you want to change it to `/about-us`, you can create a redirect from the old page to the new one, then you can use this data to write HTTP redirects into your front-end application. This will ensure that users are redirected to the correct page without penalty because search engines are notified of the change at the request level. This is a very lightweight plugin that will allow you to integrate managed redirects for any front-end framework.
 
@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { redirectsPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-redirects'
 
 const config = buildConfig({

docs/plugins/search.mdx

@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```js
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { searchPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-search'
 
 const config = buildConfig({

docs/plugins/sentry.mdx

@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin and pass in your Sentry DSN as an option.
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin and pass in your Sentry DSN as an option.
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { sentryPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-sentry'
 import { Pages, Media } from './collections'
 
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ To see all options available, visit the [Sentry Docs](https://docs.sentry.io/pla
 Configure any of these options by passing them to the plugin:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { sentry } from '@payloadcms/plugin-sentry'
 import { Pages, Media } from './collections'
 

docs/plugins/seo.mdx

@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ keywords: plugins, seo, meta, search, engine, ranking, google
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-seo)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-seo)
 
-This plugin allows you to easily manage SEO metadata for your application from within your admin panel. When enabled on your collections and globals, it adds a new `meta` field group containing `title`, `description`, and `image` by default. Your front-end application can then use this data to render meta tags however your application requires. For example, you would inject a `title` tag into the `<head>` of your page using `meta.title` as its content.
+This plugin allows you to easily manage SEO metadata for your application from within your [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). When enabled on your [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals), it adds a new `meta` field group containing `title`, `description`, and `image` by default. Your front-end application can then use this data to render meta tags however your application requires. For example, you would inject a `title` tag into the `<head>` of your page using `meta.title` as its content.
 
-As users are editing documents within the admin panel, they have the option to "auto-generate" these fields. When clicked, this plugin will execute your own custom functions that re-generate the title, description, and image. This way you can build your own SEO writing assistance directly into your application. For example, you could append your site name onto the page title, or use the document's excerpt field as the description, or even integrate with some third-party API to generate the image using AI.
+As users are editing documents within the Admin Panel, they have the option to "auto-generate" these fields. When clicked, this plugin will execute your own custom functions that re-generate the title, description, and image. This way you can build your own SEO writing assistance directly into your application. For example, you could append your site name onto the page title, or use the document's excerpt field as the description, or even integrate with some third-party API to generate the image using AI.
 
 To help you visualize what your page might look like in a search engine, a preview is rendered on page just beneath the meta fields. This preview is updated in real-time as you edit your metadata. There are also visual indicators to help you write effective meta, such as a character counter for the title and description fields. You can even inject your own custom fields into the `meta` field group as your application requires, like `og:title` or `json-ld`. If you've ever used something like Yoast SEO, this plugin might feel very familiar.
 
@@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config';
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload';
 import { seoPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-seo';
 
 const config = buildConfig({
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ seoPlugin({
 There is the option to directly import any of the fields from the plugin so that you can include them anywhere as needed.
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  You will still need to configure the plugin in the Payload config in order to configure the generation functions.
+  You will still need to configure the plugin in the Payload Config in order to configure the generation functions.
   Since these fields are imported and used directly, they don't have access to the plugin config so they may need additional arguments to work the same way.
 </Banner>
 

docs/plugins/stripe.mdx

@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ keywords: plugins, stripe, payments, ecommerce
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-stripe)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-stripe)
 
-With this plugin you can easily integrate [Stripe](https://stripe.com) into Payload. Simply provide your Stripe credentials and this plugin will open up a two-way communication channel between the two platforms. This enables you to easily sync data back and forth, as well as proxy the Stripe REST API through Payload's access control. Use this plugin to completely offload billing to Stripe and retain full control over your application's data.
+With this plugin you can easily integrate [Stripe](https://stripe.com) into Payload. Simply provide your Stripe credentials and this plugin will open up a two-way communication channel between the two platforms. This enables you to easily sync data back and forth, as well as proxy the Stripe REST API through Payload's [Access Control](../access-control). Use this plugin to completely offload billing to Stripe and retain full control over your application's data.
 
 For example, you might be building an e-commerce or SaaS application, where you have a `products` or a `plans` collection that requires either a one-time payment or a subscription. You can to tie each of these products to Stripe, then easily subscribe to billing-related events to perform your application's business logic, such as active purchases or subscription cancellations.
 
-To build a checkout flow on your front-end you can either use [Stripe Checkout](https://stripe.com/payments/checkout), or you can also build a completely custom checkout experience from scratch using [Stripe Web Elements](https://stripe.com/docs/payments/elements). Then to build fully custom, secure customer dashboards, you can leverage Payload's access control to restrict access to your Stripe resources so your users never have to leave your site to manage their accounts.
+To build a checkout flow on your front-end you can either use [Stripe Checkout](https://stripe.com/payments/checkout), or you can also build a completely custom checkout experience from scratch using [Stripe Web Elements](https://stripe.com/docs/payments/elements). Then to build fully custom, secure customer dashboards, you can leverage Payload's Access Control to restrict access to your Stripe resources so your users never have to leave your site to manage their accounts.
 
 The beauty of this plugin is the entirety of your application's content and business logic can be handled in Payload while Stripe handles solely the billing and payment processing. You can build a completely proprietary application that is endlessly customizable and extendable, on APIs and databases that you own. Hosted services like Shopify or BigCommerce might fracture your application's content then charge you for access.
 
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { stripePlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Production:
 1. Then, handle these events using the `webhooks` portion of this plugin's config:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import stripePlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ This option will setup a basic sync between Payload collections and Stripe resou
 </Banner>
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import stripePlugin from '@payloadcms/plugin-stripe'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
           stripeResourceTypeSingular: 'customer',
           fields: [
             {
-              fieldPath: 'name', // this is a field on your own Payload config
+              fieldPath: 'name', // this is a field on your own Payload Config
               stripeProperty: 'name', // use dot notation, if applicable
             },
           ],

docs/production/deployment.mdx

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ deploying to Production, it's a good idea to double-check that you are making pr
 ### The Secret Key
 
 When you initialize Payload, you provide it with a `secret` property. This property should be impossible to guess and
-extremely difficult for brute-force attacks to crack. Make sure your Production `secret` is a long, complex string. 
+extremely difficult for brute-force attacks to crack. Make sure your Production `secret` is a long, complex string.
 
 ### Double-check and thoroughly test all Access Control
 
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Note that this is different than running `next dev`. Generally, Next.js apps com
 ### Secure Cookie Settings
 
 You should be using an SSL certificate for production Payload instances, which means you
-can [enable secure cookies](/docs/authentication/config) in your Authentication-enabled Collection configs.
+can [enable secure cookies](/docs/authentication/overview) in your Authentication-enabled Collection configs.
 
 ### Preventing API Abuse
 
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ more. [Click here to learn more](/docs/production/preventing-abuse).
 
 ## Database
 
-Payload can be used with any Postgres database or MongoDB-compatible database including AWS DocumentDB or Azure Cosmos DB. Make sure your production environment has access to the database that Payload uses. 
+Payload can be used with any Postgres database or MongoDB-compatible database including AWS DocumentDB or Azure Cosmos DB. Make sure your production environment has access to the database that Payload uses.
 
 Out of the box, Payload templates pass the `process.env.DATABASE_URI` environment variable to its database adapters, so make sure you've got that environment variable (and all others that you use) assigned in your deployment platform.
 

docs/production/preventing-abuse.mdx

@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Set the max number of failed login attempts before a user account is locked out
 
 ## Max Depth
 
-Querying a collection and automatically including related documents via `depth` incurs a performance cost. Also, it's possible that your configs may have circular relationships, meaning scenarios where an infinite amount of relationships might populate back and forth until your server times out and crashes. You can prevent any potential of depth-related issues by setting a `maxDepth` property on your Payload config.. The maximum allowed depth should be as small as possible without interrupting dev experience, and it defaults to `10`.
+Querying a collection and automatically including related documents via `depth` incurs a performance cost. Also, it's possible that your configs may have circular relationships, meaning scenarios where an infinite amount of relationships might populate back and forth until your server times out and crashes. You can prevent any potential of depth-related issues by setting a `maxDepth` property on your Payload Config.. The maximum allowed depth should be as small as possible without interrupting dev experience, and it defaults to `10`.
 
 ## Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF)
 
@@ -24,21 +24,21 @@ CSRF prevention will verify the authenticity of each request to your API to prev
 
 ## Cross Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)
 
-To securely allow headless operation you will need to configure the allowed origins for requests to be able to use the Payload API. You can see how to set CORS as well as other payload configuration settings [here](/docs/configuration/overview)
+To securely allow headless operation you will need to configure the allowed origins for requests to be able to use the Payload API. You can see how to set CORS as well as other Payload configuration settings [here](/docs/configuration/overview)
 
 ## Limiting GraphQL Complexity
 
 Because GraphQL gives the power of query writing outside a server's control, someone with bad intentions might write a maliciously complex query and bog down your server. To prevent resource-intensive GraphQL requests, Payload provides a way specify complexity limits which are based on a complexity score that is calculated for each request.
 
-Any GraphQL request that is calculated to be too expensive is rejected. On the Payload config, in `graphQL` you can set the `maxComplexity` value as an integer. For reference, the default complexity value for each added field is 1, and all `relationship` and `upload` fields are assigned a value of 10.
+Any GraphQL request that is calculated to be too expensive is rejected. On the Payload Config, in `graphQL` you can set the `maxComplexity` value as an integer. For reference, the default complexity value for each added field is 1, and all `relationship` and `upload` fields are assigned a value of 10.
 
-If you do not need GraphQL it is advised that you disable it altogether with the Payload config by setting `graphQL.disable: true`. Should you wish to enable GraphQL again, you can remove this property or set it `false`, any time. By turning it off, Payload will bypass creating schemas from your collections and will not register the route.
+If you do not need GraphQL it is advised that you disable it altogether with the Payload Config by setting `graphQL.disable: true`. Should you wish to enable GraphQL again, you can remove this property or set it `false`, any time. By turning it off, Payload will bypass creating schemas from your collections and will not register the route.
 
 ## Malicious File Uploads
 
 Payload does not execute uploaded files on the server, but depending on your setup it may be used to transmit and store potentially dangerous files. If your configuration allows file uploads there is the potential that a bad actor uploads a malicious file that is then served to other users. Consider the following ways to mitigate the risks.
 
-First, enable email [verification](/docs/authentication/config#email-verification) when users are allowed to register new accounts and add other bot prevention services.
+First, enable email [verification](/docs/authentication/overview#email-verification) when users are allowed to register new accounts and add other bot prevention services.
 
 Review that `create` and `update` access on file upload collections are as restrictive as your application needs allow. Consider limiting `read` access of uploaded user's files and how you might limit user uploaded files from being served outside of Payload.
 

docs/queries/depth.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+---
+title: Depth
+label: Depth
+order: 30
+desc: Payload depth determines how many levels down related documents should be automatically populated when retrieved.
+keywords: query, documents, pagination, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+Documents in Payload can have relationships to other Documents. This is true for both [Collections](../configuration/collections) as well as [Globals](../configuration/globals). When you query a Document, you can specify the depth at which to populate any of its related Documents either as full objects, or only their IDs.
+
+Depth will optimize the performance of your application by limiting the amount of processing made in the database and significantly reducing the amount of data returned. Since Documents can be infinitely nested or recursively related, it's important to be able to control how deep your API populates.
+
+For example, when you specify a `depth` of `0`, the API response might look like this:
+
+```json
+{
+  "id": "5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832",
+  "title": "This is a great post",
+  "author": "5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17"
+}
+```
+
+But with a `depth` of `1`, the response might look like this:
+
+```json
+{
+  "id": "5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832",
+  "title": "This is a great post",
+  "author": {
+    "id": "5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17",
+    "name": "John Doe"
+  }
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Depth has no effect in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), because there, depth is based on the shape of your queries.
+</Banner>
+
+## Local API
+
+To specify depth in the [Local API](../local-api/overview), you can use the `depth` option in your query:
+
+```ts
+const getPosts = async () => {
+  const posts = await payload.find({
+    collection: 'posts',
+    depth: 2, // highlight-line
+  })
+
+  return posts
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  This is the same for [Globals](../configuration/globals) using the `findGlobal` operation.
+</Banner>
+
+## REST API
+
+To specify depth in the [REST API](../rest-api/overview), you can use the `depth` parameter in your query:
+
+```ts
+fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/posts?depth=2') // highlight-line
+  .then((res) => res.json())
+  .then((data) => console.log(data))
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  This is the same for [Globals](../configuration/globals) using the `/api/globals` endpoint.
+</Banner>
+
+## Max Depth
+
+Fields like the [Relationship Field](../fields/relationship) or the [Upload Field](../fields/upload) can also set a maximum depth. If exceeded, this will limit the population depth regardless of what the depth might be on the request.
+
+To set a max depth for a field, use the `maxDepth` property in your field configuration:
+
+```js
+{
+  slug: 'posts',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'author',
+      type: 'relationship',
+      relationTo: 'users',
+      maxDepth: 2, // highlight-line
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```

docs/queries/overview.mdx

@@ -6,54 +6,37 @@ desc: Payload provides a querying language through all APIs, allowing you to fil
 keywords: query, documents, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload provides an extremely granular querying language through all APIs. Each API takes the same syntax and fully supports all options.
+In Payload, "querying" means filtering or searching through Documents within a [Collection](../configuration/collections). The querying language in Payload is designed to be simple and powerful, allowing you to filter Documents with extreme precision through an intuitive and standardized structure.
 
-<Banner>
-  <strong>
-    Here, "querying" relates to filtering or searching through documents within a Collection.
-  </strong>
-  You can build queries to pass to Find operations as well as to [restrict which documents certain
-  users can [access](/docs/access-control/overview) via access control functions.
-</Banner>
+Payload provides three common APIs for querying your data:
 
-## Simple queries
+- [Local API](/docs/local-api/overview) - Extremely fast, direct-to-database access
+- [REST API](/docs/rest-api/overview) - Standard HTTP endpoints for querying and mutating data
+- [GraphQL](/docs/graphql/overview) - A full GraphQL API with a GraphQL Playground
 
-For example, say you have a collection as follows:
+Each of these APIs share the same underlying querying language, and fully support all of the same features. This means that you can learn Payload's querying language once, and use it across any of the APIs that you might use.
+
+To query your Documents, you can send any number of [Operators](#operators) through your request:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Post: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'posts',
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'color',
-      type: 'select',
-      options: ['mint', 'dark-gray', 'white'],
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'featured',
-      type: 'checkbox',
-    },
-  ],
-}
-```
-
-You may eventually have a lot of documents within this Collection. If you wanted to find only documents with `color` equal to `mint`, you could write a query as follows:
-
-```js
 const query = {
   color: {
-    // property name to filter on
-    equals: 'mint', // operator to use and value to compare against
+    equals: 'blue',
   },
 }
 ```
 
-The above example demonstrates a simple query but you can get much more complex.
+_The exact query syntax will depend on the API you are using, but the concepts are the same across all APIs. [More details](#writing-queries)._
+
+<Banner>
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can also use queries within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) functions.
+</Banner>
 
 ## Operators
 
+The following operators are available for use in queries:
+
 | Operator             | Description                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `equals`             | The value must be exactly equal.                                                                                                                                                  |
@@ -68,31 +51,29 @@ The above example demonstrates a simple query but you can get much more complex.
 | `not_in`             | The value must NOT be within the provided comma-delimited list of values.                                                                                                         |
 | `all`                | The value must contain all values provided in the comma-delimited list.                                                                                                           |
 | `exists`             | Only return documents where the value either exists (`true`) or does not exist (`false`).                                                                                         |
-| `near`               | For distance related to a [point field](/docs/fields/point) comma separated as `<longitude>, <latitude>, <maxDistance in meters (nullable)>, <minDistance in meters (nullable)>`. |
+| `near`               | For distance related to a [Point Field](../fields/point) comma separated as `<longitude>, <latitude>, <maxDistance in meters (nullable)>, <minDistance in meters (nullable)>`. |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip</strong>:<br />
-  If you know your users will be querying on certain fields a lot, you can add <strong>
-    index: true
-  </strong> to a field's config which will speed up searches using that field immensely.
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you know your users will be querying on certain fields a lot, add `index: true` to the Field Config. This will speed up searches using that field immensely.
 </Banner>
 
-## And / Or Logic
+### And / Or Logic
 
-In addition to defining simple queries, you can join multiple queries together using simple AND / OR logic. Let's take the above `Post` collection for example and write a more complex query using AND / OR:
+In addition to defining simple queries, you can join multiple queries together using AND / OR logic. These can be nested as deeply as you need to create complex queries.
 
-```js
+To join queries, use the `and` or `or` keys in your query object:
+
+```ts
 const query = {
-  or: [
-    // array of OR conditions
+  or: [ // highlight-line
     {
       color: {
         equals: 'mint',
       },
     },
     {
-      and: [
-        // nested array of AND conditions
+      and: [ // highlight-line
         {
           color: {
             equals: 'white',
@@ -111,7 +92,7 @@ const query = {
 
 Written in plain English, if the above query were passed to a `find` operation, it would translate to finding posts where either the `color` is `mint` OR the `color` is `white` AND `featured` is set to false.
 
-## Nested properties
+### Nested properties
 
 When working with nested properties, which can happen when using relational fields, it is possible to use the dot notation to access the nested property. For example, when working with a `Song` collection that has a `artists` field which is related to an `Artists` collection using the `name: 'artists'`. You can access a property within the collection `Artists` like so:
 
@@ -124,13 +105,34 @@ const query = {
 }
 ```
 
-## GraphQL Find Queries
+## Writing Queries
 
-All GraphQL `find` queries support the `where` argument, which accepts queries exactly as detailed above.
+Writing queries in Payload is simple and consistent across all APIs, with only minor differences in syntax between them.
 
-**For example:**
+### Local API
 
+The [Local API](../local-api/overview) supports the `find` operation that accepts a raw query object:
+
+```ts
+const getPosts = async () => {
+  const posts = await payload.find({
+    collection: 'posts',
+    where: {
+      color: {
+        equals: 'mint',
+      },
+    },
+  })
+
+  return posts
+}
 ```
+
+### GraphQL API
+
+All `find` queries in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) support the `where` argument that accepts a raw query object:
+
+```ts
 query {
   Posts(where: { color: { equals: mint } }) {
     docs {
@@ -141,19 +143,17 @@ query {
 }
 ```
 
-## REST Queries
+### REST API
 
-With the REST API, you can use the full power of Payload queries as well but they become a bit more unwieldy the more complex that they get.
-
-Simple queries are fairly straightforward to write. To understand the syntax, you need to understand that complex URL search strings are parsed into a JSON object. For example, the above [simple query](#simple-queries) would be parsed into a string like this:
+With the [REST API](../rest-api/overview), you can use the full power of Payload queries, but they are written as query strings instead:
 
 **`https://localhost:3000/api/posts?where[color][equals]=mint`**
 
-This one isn't too bad, but more complex queries get unavoidably more difficult to write as query strings. For this reason, we recommend to use the extremely helpful and ubiquitous [`qs`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/qs) package to parse your JSON / object-formatted queries into query strings for use with the REST API.
+To understand the syntax, you need to understand that complex URL search strings are parsed into a JSON object. This one isn't too bad, but more complex queries get unavoidably more difficult to write.
 
-**For example, using fetch:**
+For this reason, we recommend to use the extremely helpful and ubiquitous [`qs`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/qs) package to parse your JSON / object-formatted queries into query strings:
 
-```js
+```ts
 import { stringify } from 'qs-esm'
 
 const query = {
@@ -176,54 +176,3 @@ const getPosts = async () => {
   // Continue to handle the response below...
 }
 ```
-
-## Local API Queries
-
-The Local API's `find` operation accepts an object exactly how you write it. For example:
-
-```js
-const getPosts = async () => {
-  const posts = await payload.find({
-    collection: 'posts',
-    where: {
-      color: {
-        equals: 'mint',
-      },
-    },
-  })
-
-  return posts
-}
-```
-
-## Sort
-
-Payload `find` queries support a `sort` parameter through all APIs. Pass the `name` of a top-level field to sort by that field in ascending order. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order. Because sorting is handled by the database, the field you wish to sort on must be stored in the database to work; not a [virtual field](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges). It is recommended to enable indexing for the fields where sorting is used.
-
-**REST example:**
-**`https://localhost:3000/api/posts?sort=-createdAt`**
-
-**GraphQL example:**
-
-```
-query {
-  Posts(sort: "-createdAt") {
-    docs {
-      color
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-**Local API example:**
-
-```js
-const getPosts = async () => {
-  const posts = await payload.find({
-    collection: 'posts',
-    sort: '-createdAt',
-  })
-
-  return posts
-}
-```

docs/queries/pagination.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Pagination
 label: Pagination
-order: 20
+order: 40
 desc: Payload queries are equipped with automatic pagination so you create paginated lists of documents within your app.
 keywords: query, documents, pagination, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---

docs/queries/sort.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+---
+title: Sort
+label: Sort
+order: 20
+desc: Payload sort allows you to order your documents by a field in ascending or descending order.
+keywords: query, documents, pagination, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+Documents in Payload can be easily sorted by a specific [Field](../fields/overview). When querying Documents, you can pass the name of any top-level field, and the response will sort the Documents by that field in _ascending_ order. If prefixed with a minus symbol ("-"), they will be sorted in _descending_ order.
+
+Because sorting is handled by the database, the field cannot be a [Virtual Field](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges). It must be stored in the database to be searchable.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  For performance reasons, it is recommended to enable `index: true` for the fields that will be sorted upon. [More details](../fields/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+## Local API
+
+To sort Documents in the [Local API](../local-api/overview), you can use the `sort` option in your query:
+
+```ts
+const getPosts = async () => {
+  const posts = await payload.find({
+    collection: 'posts',
+    sort: '-createdAt', // highlight-line
+  })
+
+  return posts
+}
+```
+
+## REST API
+
+To sort in the [REST API](../rest-api/overview), you can use the `sort` parameter in your query:
+
+```ts
+fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/posts?sort=-createdAt') // highlight-line
+  .then((response) => response.json())
+  .then((data) => console.log(data))
+```
+
+## GraphQL API
+
+To sort in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can use the `sort` parameter in your query:
+
+```ts
+query {
+  Posts(sort: "-createdAt") {
+    docs {
+      color
+    }
+  }
+}
+```

docs/rest-api/overview.mdx

@@ -10,11 +10,12 @@ keywords: rest, api, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, ja
   A fully functional REST API is automatically generated from your Collection and Global configs.
 </Banner>
 
+The REST API is a fully functional HTTP client that allows you to interact with your Documents in a RESTful manner. It supports all CRUD operations and is equipped with automatic pagination, depth, and sorting.
 All Payload API routes are mounted and prefixed to your config's `routes.api` URL segment (default: `/api`).
 
 **REST query parameters:**
 
-- [depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) - automatically populates relationships and uploads
+- [depth](../queries/depth) - automatically populates relationships and uploads
 - [locale](/docs/configuration/localization#retrieving-localized-docs) - retrieves document(s) in a specific locale
 - [fallback-locale](/docs/configuration/localization#retrieving-localized-docs) - specifies a fallback locale if no locale value exists
 
@@ -570,7 +571,7 @@ In addition to the dynamically generated endpoints above Payload also has REST e
 
 ## Custom Endpoints
 
-Additional REST API endpoints can be added to your application by providing an array of `endpoints` in various places within a Payload config. Custom endpoints are useful for adding additional middleware on existing routes or for building custom functionality into Payload apps and plugins. Endpoints can be added at the top of the Payload config, `collections`, and `globals` and accessed respective of the api and slugs you have configured.
+Additional REST API endpoints can be added to your application by providing an array of `endpoints` in various places within a Payload Config. Custom endpoints are useful for adding additional middleware on existing routes or for building custom functionality into Payload apps and plugins. Endpoints can be added at the top of the Payload Config, `collections`, and `globals` and accessed respective of the api and slugs you have configured.
 
 Each endpoint object needs to have:
 
@@ -579,13 +580,13 @@ Each endpoint object needs to have:
 | **`path`**    | A string for the endpoint route after the collection or globals slug                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`method`**  | The lowercase HTTP verb to use: 'get', 'head', 'post', 'put', 'delete', 'connect' or 'options'                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`handler`** | A function or array of functions to be called with **req**, **res** and **next** arguments. [Next.js](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/route-handlers)                                                                                          |
-| **`root`**    | When `true`, defines the endpoint on the root Next.js app, bypassing Payload handlers and the `routes.api` subpath. Note: this only applies to top-level endpoints of your Payload config, endpoints defined on `collections` or `globals` cannot be root. |
+| **`root`**    | When `true`, defines the endpoint on the root Next.js app, bypassing Payload handlers and the `routes.api` subpath. Note: this only applies to top-level endpoints of your Payload Config, endpoints defined on `collections` or `globals` cannot be root. |
 | **`custom`**  | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 Example:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 // a collection of 'orders' with an additional route for tracking details, reachable at /api/orders/:id/tracking
 export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
@@ -598,7 +599,7 @@ export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
     {
       path: '/:id/tracking',
       method: 'get',
-      handler: (req) => {
+      handler: async (req) => {
         const tracking = await getTrackingInfo(req.params.id)
 
         if (!tracking) {
@@ -613,7 +614,7 @@ export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
     {
       path: '/:id/tracking',
       method: 'post',
-      handler: (req) => {
+      handler: async (req) => {
         // `data` is not automatically appended to the request
         // if you would like to read the body of the request
         // you can use `data = await req.json()`
@@ -636,9 +637,7 @@ export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
 
 <Banner>
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  **req** will have the **payload** object and can be used inside your endpoint handlers for making
-  calls like req.payload.find() that will make use of access control and hooks.
+  **req** will have the **payload** object and can be used inside your endpoint handlers for making calls like req.payload.find() that will make use of [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview).
 </Banner>
 
 #### Helpful tips
@@ -655,7 +654,7 @@ import { addDataAndFileToRequest } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
 {
   path: '/:id/tracking',
   method: 'post',
-  handler: (req) => {
+  handler: async (req) => {
     await addDataAndFileToRequest(req)
     await req.payload.update({
       collection: 'tracking',
@@ -681,7 +680,7 @@ import { addLocalesToRequestFromData } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
 {
   path: '/:id/tracking',
   method: 'post',
-  handler: (req) => {
+  handler: async (req) => {
     await addLocalesToRequestFromData(req)
     // you now can access req.locale & req.fallbackLocale
     return Response.json({ message: 'success' })
@@ -689,8 +688,6 @@ import { addLocalesToRequestFromData } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
 }
 ```
 
-
-
 ## Method Override for GET Requests
 
 Payload supports a method override feature that allows you to send GET requests using the HTTP POST method. This can be particularly useful in scenarios when the query string in a regular GET request is too long.

docs/rich-text/slate.mdx

@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ To use the Slate editor, first you need to install it:
 npm install --save @payloadcms/richtext-slate
 ```
 
-After installation, you can pass it to your top-level Payload config:
+After installation, you can pass it to your top-level Payload Config:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 And here's an example for how to install the Slate editor on a field-by-field basis, while customizing its options:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
 
 export const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ export const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
 
 **`elements`**
 
-The `elements` property is used to specify which built-in or custom [SlateJS elements](https://docs.slatejs.org/concepts/02-nodes#element) should be made available to the field within the admin panel.
+The `elements` property is used to specify which built-in or custom [SlateJS elements](https://docs.slatejs.org/concepts/02-nodes#element) should be made available to the field within the Admin Panel.
 
 The default `elements` available in Payload are:
 
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Specifying custom `Type`s let you extend your custom elements by adding addition
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
 

docs/troubleshooting/troubleshooting.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Managemen
 
 ### "Unauthorized, you must be logged in to make this request" when attempting to log in
 
-This means that your auth cookie is not being set or accepted correctly upon logging in. To resolve heck the following settings in your Payload config:
+This means that your auth cookie is not being set or accepted correctly upon logging in. To resolve heck the following settings in your Payload Config:
 
 - CORS - If you are using the '\*', try to explicitly only allow certain domains instead including the one you have specified.
 - CSRF - Do you have this set? if so, make sure your domain is whitelisted within the csrf domains. If not, probably not the issue, but probably can't hurt to whitelist it anyway.

docs/typescript/generating-types.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ desc: Generate your own TypeScript interfaces based on your collections and glob
 keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-While building your own custom functionality into Payload, like plugins, hooks, access control functions, custom views, GraphQL queries / mutations, or anything else, you may benefit from generating your own TypeScript types dynamically from your Payload config itself.
+While building your own custom functionality into Payload, like [Plugins](../plugins/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Access Control](../access-control/overview) functions, [Custom Views](../admin/views), [GraphQL queries / mutations](../graphql/overview), or anything else, you may benefit from generating your own TypeScript types dynamically from your Payload Config itself.
 
 ## Types generation script
 
-Run the following command in a Payload project to generate types based on your Payload config:
+Run the following command in a Payload project to generate types based on your Payload Config:
 
 ```
 payload generate:types
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ declare module 'payload' {
 
 ## Custom output file path
 
-You can specify where you want your types to be generated by adding a property to your Payload config:
+You can specify where you want your types to be generated by adding a property to your Payload Config:
 
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ You can specify where you want your types to be generated by adding a property t
 }
 ```
 
-The above example places your types next to your Payload config itself as the file `generated-types.ts`.
+The above example places your types next to your Payload Config itself as the file `generated-types.ts`.
 
 ## Custom generated types
 
@@ -100,13 +100,13 @@ This function takes the existing JSON schema as an argument and returns the modi
 
 ## Example Usage
 
-For example, let's look at the following simple Payload config:
+For example, let's look at the following simple Payload Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Config } from 'payload'
 
 const config: Config = {
-  serverURL: process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_SERVER_URL,
+  serverURL: process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_SERVER_URL,
   admin: {
     user: 'users',
   },
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ export interface Collection1 {
 
 ## Using your types
 
-Now that your types have been generated, payloads local API will now be typed. It is common for users to want to use this in their frontend code, we recommend generating them with payload and then copying the file over to your frontend codebase. This is the simplest way to get your types into your frontend codebase.
+Now that your types have been generated, payloads local API will now be typed. It is common for users to want to use this in their frontend code, we recommend generating them with Payload and then copying the file over to your frontend codebase. This is the simplest way to get your types into your frontend codebase.
 
 ### Adding an NPM script
 

docs/typescript/overview.mdx

@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ It's also possible to set up a TypeScript project from scratch. We plan to write
 
 ## Using Payload's Exported Types
 
-Payload exports a number of types that you may find useful while writing your own plugins, hooks, access control functions, custom views, GraphQL queries / mutations, or anything else.
+Payload exports a number of types that you may find useful while writing your own custom functionality like [Plugins](../plugins/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Access Control](../access-control/overview) functions, [Custom Views](../admin/views), [GraphQL queries / mutations](../graphql/overview) or anything else.
 
 ## Config Types
 

docs/upload/overview.mdx

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ keywords: uploads, images, media, overview, documentation, Content Management Sy
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/upload-admin.jpg"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/upload-admin.jpg"
-  alt="Shows an Upload enabled collection in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows an Upload enabled collection in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot depicting a Media Collection with Upload enabled"
 />
 
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Uploads by specifying the `upl
 </Banner>
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'media',
@@ -89,31 +89,31 @@ export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
 
 _An asterisk denotes that an option is required._
 
-| Option                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Option                         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`adminThumbnail`**           | Set the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) will display thumbnails for this Collection. [More](#admin-thumbnails)                                                                                                          |
 | **`crop`**                     | Set to `false` to disable the cropping tool in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Crop is enabled by default. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector)                                                                               |
-| **`disableLocalStorage`**      | Completely disable uploading files to disk locally. [More](#disabling-local-upload-storage)                                                                                                                      |
-| **`externalFileHeaderFilter`** | Accepts existing headers and returns the headers after filtering or modifying.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`filesRequiredOnCreate`**    | Mandate file data on creation, default is true.                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`disableLocalStorage`**      | Completely disable uploading files to disk locally. [More](#disabling-local-upload-storage)                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`externalFileHeaderFilter`** | Accepts existing headers and returns the headers after filtering or modifying.                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`filesRequiredOnCreate`**    | Mandate file data on creation, default is true.                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`focalPoint`**               | Set to `false` to disable the focal point selection tool in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). The focal point selector is only available when `imageSizes` or `resizeOptions` are defined. [More](#crop-and-focal-point-selector) |
-| **`formatOptions`**            | An object with `format` and `options` that are used with the Sharp image library to format the upload file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-output#toformat)                                          |
-| **`handlers`**                 | Array of Request handlers to execute when fetching a file, if a handler returns a Response it will be sent to the client. Otherwise Payload will retrieve and send back the file.                                |
-| **`imageSizes`**               | If specified, image uploads will be automatically resized in accordance to these image sizes. [More](#image-sizes)                                                                                               |
-| **`mimeTypes`**                | Restrict mimeTypes in the file picker. Array of valid mimetypes or mimetype wildcards [More](#mimetypes)                                                                                                         |
-| **`resizeOptions`**            | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to resize the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize)                                                                                  |
-| **`staticDir`**                | The folder directory to use to store media in. Can be either an absolute path or relative to the directory that contains your config. Defaults to your collection slug                                           |
-| **`trimOptions`**              | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to trim the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize#trim)                                                                               |
+| **`formatOptions`**            | An object with `format` and `options` that are used with the Sharp image library to format the upload file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-output#toformat)                                                               |
+| **`handlers`**                 | Array of Request handlers to execute when fetching a file, if a handler returns a Response it will be sent to the client. Otherwise Payload will retrieve and send back the file.                                                     |
+| **`imageSizes`**               | If specified, image uploads will be automatically resized in accordance to these image sizes. [More](#image-sizes)                                                                                                                    |
+| **`mimeTypes`**                | Restrict mimeTypes in the file picker. Array of valid mimetypes or mimetype wildcards [More](#mimetypes)                                                                                                                              |
+| **`resizeOptions`**            | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to resize the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize)                                                                                                       |
+| **`staticDir`**                | The folder directory to use to store media in. Can be either an absolute path or relative to the directory that contains your config. Defaults to your collection slug                                                                |
+| **`trimOptions`**              | An object passed to the the Sharp image library to trim the uploaded file. [More](https://sharp.pixelplumbing.com/api-resize#trim)                                                                                                    |
 
 
 ### Payload-wide Upload Options
 
-Upload options are specifiable on a Collection by Collection basis, you can also control app wide options by passing your base Payload config an `upload` property containing an object supportive of all `Busboy` configuration options. [Click here](https://github.com/mscdex/busboy#api) for more documentation about what you can control.
+Upload options are specifiable on a Collection by Collection basis, you can also control app wide options by passing your base Payload Config an `upload` property containing an object supportive of all `Busboy` configuration options. [Click here](https://github.com/mscdex/busboy#api) for more documentation about what you can control.
 
 A common example of what you might want to customize within Payload-wide Upload options would be to increase the allowed `fileSize` of uploads sent to Payload:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ You can specify how Payload retrieves admin thumbnails for your upload-enabled C
 1. `adminThumbnail` as a **string**, equal to one of your provided image size names.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'media',
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
 2. `adminThumbnail` as a **function** that takes the document's data and sends back a full URL to load the thumbnail.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'media',
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Some example values are: `image/*`, `audio/*`, `video/*`, `image/png`, `applicat
 **Example mimeTypes usage:**
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Media: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'media',